Table of Contents

Advertisement

X20 system
User's Manual
Version: 3.10 (May 2015)
Model no.: MAX20-ENG
All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. B&R reserves the right to change
the contents of this manual without notice. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of
the date of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, ex-
pressed or implied, with regard to the products or documentation contained within this manual. In addition,
Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages
in connection with or arising from the furnishing, performance or use of the product(s) in this documentation. Soft-
ware names, hardware names and trademarks are registered by their respective companies.

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the X20 System and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Summary of Contents for B&R Industries X20 System

  • Page 1 X20 system User's Manual Version: 3.10 (May 2015) Model no.: MAX20-ENG All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. B&R reserves the right to change the contents of this manual without notice. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication;...
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    2.13 Space for options............................71 2.14 Flexibility for options........................... 71 2.15 Configurable X2X Link address........................72 2.16 Universal 1, 2, 3-wire connections......................73 2.17 Coated X20 system............................ 74 2.18 Redundancy..............................74 2.19 reACTION technology..........................74 2.20 X20 system configuration........................... 75 2.20.1 Fieldbus connection..........................76 2.20.2 Connection to X2X Link backplane.......................
  • Page 4 3.21 Safe cutoff..............................96 3.21.1 General information..........................96 3.21.2 Scope of application / Standards referenced..................96 3.21.3 Intended use............................96 3.21.4 Qualified personnel..........................96 3.21.5 Application in the X20 system.......................97 3.21.5.1 Suitable modules..........................97 3.21.6 General notices............................. 98 3.21.6.1 Installation notes..........................98 3.21.6.2 Timing...............................98 3.21.6.3 Potential group structure........................99...
  • Page 5 3.24.6.1 Calculating the internal X2X Link power consumption of the X20BR9300........112 3.24.6.2 Calculating the internal I/O power consumption of the X20BR9300..........113 3.24.6.3 Total internal power consumption of the X20BR9300..............115 4 X20 system modules.................... 116 4.1 Module overview: Alphabetically.........................116 4.2 Module overview: Grouped......................... 121 4.3 Analog input modules..........................
  • Page 6 4.3.9.7 Input circuit diagram........................261 4.3.9.8 Register description......................... 262 4.3.10 X20AI4322............................267 4.3.10.1 General information........................267 4.3.10.2 Order data............................267 4.3.10.3 Technical data..........................267 4.3.10.4 LED status indicators........................268 4.3.10.5 Pinout............................. 269 4.3.10.6 Connection example........................269 4.3.10.7 Input circuit diagram........................269 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 7 4.4.2.6 Connection example........................393 4.4.2.7 OSP hardware requirements......................393 4.4.2.8 Output circuit diagram........................393 4.4.2.9 Derating............................394 4.4.2.10 Register description........................395 4.4.3 X20AO2438............................401 4.4.3.1 General information..........................401 4.4.3.2 Order data............................401 4.4.3.3 Technical data..........................401 4.4.3.4 LED status indicators........................403 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 8 4.4.8.4 LED status indicators........................482 4.4.8.5 Pinout............................... 483 4.4.8.6 Connection example........................483 4.4.8.7 Output circuit diagram........................483 4.4.8.8 Module operation..........................484 4.4.8.9 Register description......................... 486 4.4.9 X20AO4632-1............................489 4.4.9.1 General information..........................489 4.4.9.2 Order data............................489 4.4.9.3 Technical data..........................489 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 9 4.5.4.4 LED status indicators........................522 4.5.4.5 Operating and connection elements....................523 4.5.4.6 DeviceNet interface..........................523 4.5.4.7 Terminating resistor......................... 524 4.5.4.8 Node number........................... 524 4.5.4.9 Automatic transfer rate detection.....................525 4.5.4.10 Clearing the parameters........................ 525 4.5.4.11 Automatic configuration of the I/O modules...................526 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 10 4.5.9.5 Operating and connection elements....................549 4.5.9.6 RJ45 ports............................549 4.5.9.7 EtherNet/IP address switching positions..................550 4.5.9.8 Setting the IP address (default value)..................... 550 4.5.9.9 Automatic IP assignment by DHCP server..................551 4.5.9.10 Changing the IP address with the network address switch............551 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 11 4.6.3.9 Register description......................... 576 4.6.4 X20PS9402............................578 4.6.4.1 General information..........................578 4.6.4.2 Order data............................578 4.6.4.3 Technical data..........................578 4.6.4.4 LED status indicators........................579 4.6.4.5 Pinout............................... 580 4.6.4.6 Connection examples........................580 4.6.4.7 Derating for bus controller / X2X Link supply..................581 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 12 4.8.1 Brief information............................ 600 4.8.2 X20BR9300............................601 4.8.2.1 General information..........................601 4.8.2.2 Order data............................601 4.8.2.3 Technical data..........................602 4.8.2.4 LED status indicators........................603 4.8.2.5 Pinout............................... 603 4.8.2.6 Connection examples........................604 4.8.2.7 Derating............................604 4.8.2.8 Register description......................... 605 4.8.3 X20BT9100............................607 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 13 4.10.4.4 LED status indicators........................636 4.10.4.5 Pinout............................. 636 4.10.4.6 Connection examples........................637 4.10.4.7 Derating............................637 4.10.4.8 Register description........................638 4.10.5 X20PS9502............................639 4.10.5.1 General information........................639 4.10.5.2 Order data............................639 4.10.5.3 Technical data..........................639 4.10.5.4 LED status indicators........................641 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 14 4.11.6.2 Order data............................694 4.11.6.3 Technical data..........................694 4.11.6.4 LED status indicators........................696 4.11.6.5 Pinout..............................696 4.11.6.6 Connection example........................696 4.11.6.7 Input circuit diagram........................697 4.11.6.8 Output circuit diagram........................697 4.11.6.9 Register description........................698 4.11.7 X20DC11A6............................701 4.11.7.1 General information........................701 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 15 4.11.12.3 Technical data..........................764 4.11.12.4 LED status indicators........................766 4.11.12.5 Pinout............................766 4.11.12.6 Connection example........................766 4.11.12.7 Input circuit diagram........................767 4.11.12.8 Register description........................768 4.11.13 X20DC2190............................780 4.11.13.1 General information........................780 4.11.13.2 Order data............................ 780 4.11.13.3 Technical data..........................780 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 16 4.12.2 X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1......................895 4.12.2.1 General information........................895 4.12.2.2 Order data - X20CP148x....................... 896 4.12.2.3 Technical data - X20CP148x......................897 4.12.2.4 X20 CPUs - Status LEDs......................900 4.12.2.5 LED status indicators for the integrated power supply..............903 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 17 4.13.2.8 Input filter............................939 4.13.2.9 Register description........................940 4.13.3 X20DI2372............................942 4.13.3.1 General Information........................942 4.13.3.2 Order data............................942 4.13.3.3 Technical data..........................943 4.13.3.4 Status LEDs........................... 944 4.13.3.5 Pinout............................. 944 4.13.3.6 Connection example........................944 4.13.3.7 Input circuit diagram........................945 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 18 4.13.8.6 Connection example........................977 4.13.8.7 Input circuit diagram........................978 4.13.8.8 Input filter............................978 4.13.8.9 Open circuit and short circuit detection..................978 4.13.8.10 Error status...........................979 4.13.8.11 Timestamp............................ 979 4.13.8.12 Configuration..........................979 4.13.8.13 Register description........................980 4.13.9 X20DI4653............................986 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 19 4.13.13.7 Input circuit diagram........................1016 4.13.13.8 Input filter........................... 1016 4.13.13.9 Register description........................1017 4.13.14 X20DI6553............................1019 4.13.14.1 General Information........................1019 4.13.14.2 Order data..........................1019 4.13.14.3 Technical data..........................1020 4.13.14.4 Status LEDs..........................1021 4.13.14.5 Pinout............................1021 4.13.14.6 Connection example........................1021 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 20 4.13.19.2 Order data..........................1049 4.13.19.3 Technical data..........................1050 4.13.19.4 Status LEDs..........................1051 4.13.19.5 Pinout............................1051 4.13.19.6 Connection example........................1051 4.13.19.7 Input circuit diagram........................1052 4.13.19.8 Input filter........................... 1052 4.13.19.9 Register description........................1053 4.14 Digital mixed modules..........................1055 4.14.1 Brief information..........................1055 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 21 4.15.6.1 General information........................1091 4.15.6.2 Order data............................ 1091 4.15.6.3 Technical data..........................1092 4.15.6.4 Status LEDs..........................1093 4.15.6.5 Pinout............................1093 4.15.6.6 Connection example........................1094 4.15.6.7 OSP hardware requirements....................... 1094 4.15.6.8 Output circuit diagram........................1094 4.15.6.9 External fuses..........................1095 4.15.6.10 Derating............................1095 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 22 4.15.10.11 Register description........................1134 4.15.11 X20DO4332............................1138 4.15.11.1 General information........................1138 4.15.11.2 Order data..........................1138 4.15.11.3 Technical data..........................1138 4.15.11.4 Status LEDs..........................1140 4.15.11.5 Pinout............................1140 4.15.11.6 Connection example........................1141 4.15.11.7 OSP hardware requirements......................1141 4.15.11.8 Output circuit diagram........................ 1141 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 23 4.15.15.11 Operating principle........................1179 4.15.15.12 Open line detection........................1179 4.15.15.13 Operation with inductive loads....................1180 4.15.15.14 Register description......................... 1181 4.15.16 X20DO4649............................. 1190 4.15.16.1 General information........................1190 4.15.16.2 Order data..........................1190 4.15.16.3 Technical data..........................1190 4.15.16.4 Status LEDs..........................1192 4.15.16.5 Pinout............................1192 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 24 4.15.20.10 Register description......................... 1226 4.15.21 X20DO6639............................. 1228 4.15.21.1 General information........................1228 4.15.21.2 Order data..........................1228 4.15.21.3 Technical data..........................1228 4.15.21.4 Status LEDs..........................1230 4.15.21.5 Pinout............................1230 4.15.21.6 Connection example........................1230 4.15.21.7 Output circuit diagram........................1231 4.15.21.8 Electrical service life........................1231 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 25 4.15.26.6 Connection example........................1273 4.15.26.7 Output circuit diagram........................1274 4.15.26.8 Switching inductive loads......................1274 4.15.26.9 Operation with 2 A........................1276 4.15.26.10 Register description......................... 1277 4.15.27 X20DO9321............................. 1282 4.15.27.1 General information........................1282 4.15.27.2 Order data..........................1282 4.15.27.3 Technical data..........................1282 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 26 4.16.2.10 Register description........................1317 4.16.3 X20DC1073............................1332 4.16.3.1 General information........................1332 4.16.3.2 Order data............................ 1332 4.16.3.3 Technical data..........................1333 4.16.3.4 LED status indicators........................1334 4.16.3.5 Pinout............................1334 4.16.3.6 Connection example........................1335 4.16.3.7 Analog inputs - Input circuit diagram...................1335 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 27 4.18.2.2 Order data............................ 1461 4.18.2.3 Technical data..........................1462 4.18.2.4 LED status indicators........................1463 4.18.2.5 Pinout............................1464 4.18.2.6 Connection example........................1464 4.18.2.7 Configuration button........................1464 4.18.2.8 Register description........................1465 4.18.3 X20CS1012............................1476 4.18.3.1 General information........................1476 4.18.3.2 Order data............................ 1476 4.18.3.3 Technical data..........................1477 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 28 4.19.2.4 LED status indicators........................1710 4.19.2.5 Operating and connection elements.................... 1711 4.19.2.6 POWERLINK node number......................1711 4.19.2.7 Ethernet interface.........................1711 4.19.2.8 Slot for interface modules......................1712 4.19.2.9 Operating netX modules with the X20BC1083 bus controller............. 1712 4.19.2.10 SG3............................1712 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 29 4.20.4.4 Use with POWERLINK bus controllers..................1743 4.20.4.5 LED status indicators........................1744 4.20.4.6 Operating and connection elements.................... 1744 4.20.4.7 X2X Link interface (IF1).......................1744 4.20.4.8 Firmware............................1744 4.21 Fieldbus CPUs............................1745 4.21.1 Brief information..........................1746 4.21.2 X20XC0201, X20XC0202, X20XC0292.................... 1747 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 30 4.23.2.2 Order data............................ 1769 4.23.2.3 Technical data..........................1770 4.23.2.4 LED status indicators........................1771 4.23.2.5 Operating and connection elements.................... 1771 4.23.2.6 RS232 interface (IF1)........................1771 4.23.2.7 Firmware............................1771 4.23.3 X20IF1030............................1772 4.23.3.1 General information........................1772 4.23.3.2 Order data............................ 1772 4.23.3.3 Technical data..........................1773 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 31 4.23.8.4 LED status indicators........................1793 4.23.8.5 Operating and connection elements.................... 1793 4.23.8.6 PROFIBUS DP interface......................1793 4.23.8.7 Firmware............................1793 4.23.9 X20IF1061-1............................1794 4.23.9.1 General information........................1794 4.23.9.2 Order data............................ 1794 4.23.9.3 Technical data..........................1795 4.23.9.4 LED status indicators........................1796 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 32 4.23.14.7 RJ45 ports..........................1817 4.23.14.8 Firmware.............................1817 4.23.15 X20IF1082-2............................ 1818 4.23.15.1 General information........................1818 4.23.15.2 Order data..........................1818 4.23.15.3 Technical data..........................1819 4.23.15.4 LED status indicators......................... 1820 4.23.15.5 Operating and connection elements..................1822 4.23.15.6 POWERLINK station number.....................1822 4.23.15.7 RJ45 ports..........................1823 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 33 4.23.21 X20IF10E1-1............................1845 4.23.21.1 General information........................1845 4.23.21.2 Order data..........................1845 4.23.21.3 Technical data..........................1846 4.23.21.4 LED status indicators......................... 1847 4.23.21.5 Operating and connection elements..................1847 4.23.21.6 Ethernet interface........................1848 4.23.21.7 Use with POWERLINK bus controllers..................1848 4.23.21.8 Firmware.............................1848 4.23.22 X20IF10E3-1............................1849 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 34 4.23.27.3 Technical data..........................1879 4.23.27.4 LED status indicators......................... 1880 4.23.27.5 Operating and connection elements..................1880 4.23.27.6 X2X Link interface (IF1)......................1880 4.23.27.7 CAN bus node number......................1881 4.23.27.8 CAN bus interface........................1881 4.23.27.9 Terminating resistor........................1881 4.23.27.10 Firmware...........................1881 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 35 4.24.5.5 Operating and connection elements.................... 1910 4.24.5.6 EtherCAT interface........................1910 4.24.5.7 Network address switch....................... 1911 4.24.5.8 Slot for EtherCAT junction module....................1911 4.25 Motor controllers............................. 1912 4.25.1 Brief information..........................1912 4.25.2 X20MM2436............................1913 4.25.2.1 General information........................1913 4.25.2.2 Order data............................ 1913 4.25.2.3 Technical data..........................1913 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 36 4.25.5.4 LED status indicators........................1958 4.25.5.5 Connection elements........................1959 4.25.5.6 Connection examples........................1960 4.25.5.7 Possible uses for digital inputs....................1960 4.25.5.8 Input circuit diagram........................1961 4.25.5.9 Output circuit diagram........................1961 4.25.5.10 Protection........................... 1962 4.25.5.11 Monitoring the module supply....................1963 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 37 4.26.3.3 Technical data..........................2210 4.26.3.4 LED status indicators........................2213 4.26.3.5 Pinout............................2213 4.26.3.6 Connection example........................2214 4.26.3.7 Input circuit diagram........................2214 4.26.3.8 Output circuit diagram........................2215 4.26.3.9 Switching inductive loads......................2215 4.26.3.10 Register description........................2216 4.26.4 X20CM8323............................2227 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 38 4.26.9.4 LED status indicators........................2322 4.26.9.5 Pinout............................2322 4.26.9.6 Connection examples........................2323 4.26.9.7 Register description........................2324 4.26.10 X20PS4951............................2325 4.26.10.1 General information........................2325 4.26.10.2 Order data..........................2325 4.26.10.3 Technical data..........................2326 4.26.10.4 LED status indicators......................... 2327 4.26.10.5 Pinout............................2327 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 39 4.28.2.6 POWERLINK station number.......................2355 4.28.2.7 Ethernet interface.........................2355 4.28.2.8 POWERLINK cable redundancy system..................2356 4.28.2.9 Redundant supply voltage......................2364 4.29 System modules for the X20 hub system....................2366 4.29.1 Brief information..........................2366 4.29.2 X20HB1881............................2367 4.29.2.1 General information........................2367 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 40 4.30.3.5 Operating and connection elements.................... 2388 4.30.3.6 Ethernet interfaces........................2388 4.30.3.7 Wiring guidelines for X20 modules with fiber optic cable............2388 4.31 Temperature modules..........................2389 4.31.1 Brief information..........................2389 4.31.2 Measurement methods........................2390 4.31.3 X20AT2222............................2391 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 41 4.31.8.3 Technical data..........................2453 4.31.8.4 Status LEDs..........................2456 4.31.8.5 Pinout............................2456 4.31.8.6 Connection examples........................2456 4.31.8.7 Input circuit diagram........................2458 4.31.8.8 Increased precision........................2459 4.31.8.9 X20ATC402 - Register description....................2460 4.32 Terminal blocks............................2474 4.32.1 Brief information..........................2474 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 42 5.4 Analog output modules..........................2503 5.4.1 Brief information..........................2503 5.4.2 X20cAO2437............................2504 5.4.2.1 General information........................2504 5.4.2.2 Order data............................2504 5.4.2.3 Technical data..........................2504 5.4.3 X20cAO2438............................2506 5.4.3.1 General information........................2506 5.4.3.2 Order data............................2506 5.4.3.3 Technical data..........................2507 5.4.4 X20cAO4622............................2509 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 43 5.7.4 X20cBM12............................2532 5.7.4.1 General information........................2532 5.7.4.2 Order data............................2532 5.7.4.3 Technical data..........................2533 5.7.5 X20cBM31............................2534 5.7.5.1 General information........................2534 5.7.5.2 Bestelldaten............................2534 5.7.5.3 Technical data..........................2535 5.7.6 X20cBM32............................2536 5.7.6.1 General information........................2536 5.7.6.2 Order data............................2536 5.7.6.3 Technical data..........................2537 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 44 5.11.5.3 Technical data..........................2564 5.11.6 X20cDI9371............................2565 5.11.6.1 General information........................2565 5.11.6.2 Order data............................ 2565 5.11.6.3 Technical data..........................2566 5.11.7 X20cDI9372............................2567 5.11.7.1 General information........................2567 5.11.7.2 Order data............................ 2567 5.11.7.3 Technical data..........................2568 5.12 Digital mixed modules..........................2569 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 45 5.16.2 X20cBC1083............................2593 5.16.2.1 General information........................2593 5.16.2.2 Order data............................ 2593 5.16.2.3 Technical data..........................2594 5.16.3 X20cBC8083............................2595 5.16.3.1 General information........................2595 5.16.3.2 Order data............................ 2595 5.16.3.3 Technical data..........................2596 5.16.4 X20cBC8084............................2597 5.16.4.1 General information........................2597 5.16.4.2 Order data............................ 2597 5.16.4.3 Technical data..........................2598 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 46 5.20.7.2 Order data............................ 2621 5.20.7.3 Technical data..........................2622 5.20.8 X20cIF10X0............................2623 5.20.8.1 General information........................2623 5.20.8.2 Order data............................ 2623 5.20.8.3 Technical data..........................2624 5.20.9 X20cIF2181-2............................ 2625 5.20.9.1 General information........................2625 5.20.9.2 Order data............................ 2625 5.20.9.3 Technical data..........................2626 5.21 Other functions............................2627 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 47 5.25 System modules for the X20 redundancy system..................2651 5.25.1 Brief information..........................2651 5.25.2 X20cHB2885............................2652 5.25.2.1 General information........................2652 5.25.2.2 Order data............................ 2652 5.25.2.3 Technical data..........................2653 5.26 Temperature modules..........................2654 5.26.1 Brief information..........................2654 5.26.2 X20cAT4222............................2655 5.26.2.1 General information........................2655 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 48 7.3 Assembling an X20 system........................2668 7.3.1 Variant 1.............................. 2669 7.3.2 Variant 2.............................. 2672 7.4 Installing the X20 system on the top-hat rail....................2675 7.5 Removing the X20 system from the top-hat rail..................2676 7.5.1 Remove the entire system from the top-hat rail................. 2676 7.5.2 Removing a block of modules from the top-hat rail................
  • Page 49 Table of contents B.3 B&R ID codes sorted by model number....................2698 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 50: General Information

    Bus controller • Digital input modules • Digital output modules • Analog input modules • Temperature modules • Other modules • Counter modules Accessories added New: Appendix B "B&R ID codes" Table 1: Manual history X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 51 Terminal blocks • Bus controller • Power supply modules • Digital input modules • Digital output modules • Analog input modules • Counter modules Accessories added 1.20 June 2006 First edition Table 1: Manual history X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 52: Safety Notices

    Electronic devices are never completely failsafe. If the programmable control system, operating/monitoring device or uninterruptible power supply fails, the user is responsible for ensuring that other connected devices, e.g. motors, are brought to a secure state. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 53: Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge

    • ESD protective measures for individual components are thoroughly integrated at B&R (conductive floors, footwear, arm bands, etc.). • These increased ESD protective measures for individual components are not necessary for customers handling B&R products. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 54: Transport And Storage

    • Connectors are not allowed to carry voltages and must be removed. • Replacing a module during operation must be supported by the software; otherwise, disconnecting a mod- ule will cause an emergency stop of the controller. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 55: Operation

    Disregarding these safety guidelines and notices can result in severe injury or substantial damage to equipment. Caution! Disregarding these safety guidelines and notices can result in injury or damage to equipment. Information: This information is important for preventing errors. Table 3: Description of the safety notices used in this documentation X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 56: Terminology

    ARsim, ARwin, ARemb • APC620, APC700, APC810 System Generation Compact CPUs (SGC) - CPUs with Motorola processors (embedded µP) The following CPUs belong to this series: • CP0201, CP0291, CP0292 • XC0201, XC0202, XC0292 Table 4: Terminology X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 57: System Features

    2.1.1 More than just I/O With its well thought-out details and a sophisticated ergonomic design, the X20 system is more than a remote I/O system – it's a complete control solution. The X20 system family makes it possible to combine the exact components needed to meet any application requirements.
  • Page 58: X 1 = 1

    • Added value 12 channels with a width of 12.5 mm allow a component density never before achieved with optimal terminal ergonomics. As a result, the X20 system offers 50% more channels than conventional slice systems. And this without sacrificing terminal connections.
  • Page 59: Optimized Design

    • Preconfigured for different machine types The X20 system bus modules are the basic platform for many machine variations. The design of the ma- chine determines which electronics modules are used. The software recognizes this design automatically and makes sure that the right functions are provided where they are needed.
  • Page 60: Remote Backplane

    A 100 m X2X Link cable is available from B&R for custom assembly (model number: X67CA0X99.1000). X20 system 100 m 100 m X20 system X20 system X20 system 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m X20 system Figure 4: X2X Link - universal backplane based on twisted copper cables X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 61: X20 Cpus

    2.4 X20 CPUs 2.4.1 General information The optimally scaled X20 system CPU line satisfies a wide range of needs. It can be implemented anywhere, from standard applications to the most demanding applications with the highest performance requirements. It can even master cycle times of 100 µs.
  • Page 62: B&R Automation Studio

    The dimensions of the CPU match those of the X20 modules, which prevents unnecessary waste of space in the control cabinet. Fanless operation - a demand the X20 CPUs can satisfy. None of the processors require a fan, which makes them virtually maintenance-free. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 63: X20 Compact Cpus

    The Compact CPU's design and dimensions correspond to the X20 system. The X20 I/O modules are connected directly to the CPU. These are attached seamlessly to the CPU, making the entire system an extreme space saver in the control cabinet.
  • Page 64: X20 Fieldbus Cpus

    2.6.3 Programming All CPUs have several features in common, including integrated connection of X20 modules and system multitask- ing capability. With B&R Automation Studio, programming can be done in all IEC 61131-3 languages and in C. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 65: For All Fieldbuses, Integration Through Standardization

    The X20 system is ideally suited for expanding existing control systems using standard fieldbus technology. For example, a bus controller allows the X20 system to be used as a powerful I/O expansion unit. Standardized EDS or GSD description files allow X20 system components to be integrated, configured, and programmed in the programming environment of a non-B&R system.
  • Page 66: Complete System

    - advantages that pay off. You select your automation components and distribute them as needed inside and outside the control cabinet. Figure 9: X20, X67, XV - variations of a single system X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 67: Easy Wiring

    The wire connections can be removed with a screwdriver. Each terminal also has an access point for a measure- ment probe. A great deal of thought was given to designing every aspect of the X20 system. Right down to the wire connectors.
  • Page 68: Sophisticated Mechanics

    These features allow the X20 system to be mounted on a top-hat rail with the same ease as a rack system. They also make it just as simple to remove it from the rail.
  • Page 69: Diagnostics

    The different states are displayed in different ways, e.g. green for OK, red for error. • Via software in the cyclic data image. With the X20 system, status data does not result in an additional communication load, which would result in considerable differences between theoretically possible bus speeds and real requirements during operation.
  • Page 70: Re Leds

    System features 2.11.1 re LEDs Each X20 system module has a LEDs for diagnostics at the top. The operating state of the module firmware is indicated by the two topmost LEDs r (green) and e (red). Additional LEDs depend on the module and generally indicate the status of I/O channels. Green LEDs are usually used for inputs, while yellow is used for outputs.
  • Page 71: Embedded Parameter Chip

    FDA. 2.13 Space for options The X20 system family makes it possible to combine the exact components necessary depending on the user's de- mands and individual application requirements. This allows machine options to be implemented easily and flexibly.
  • Page 72: Configurable X2X Link Address

    For this purpose, there are modules in both the X20 system and the X67 system with node number switches that allow you to set the X2X Link address. All subsequent modules refer to this offset and use it automatically for addressing purposes.
  • Page 73: Universal 1, 2, 3-Wire Connections

    12 channels - unequaled component density Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Sensor 3 Sensor 4 Sensor 5 Sensor 6 Sensor 7 Sensor 8 Sensor 9 Sensor 10 Sensor 11 Sensor 12 +24 VDC +24 VDC +24 VDC +24 VDC X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 74: Coated X20 System

    System features 2.17 Coated X20 system The X20 system includes modules with a protective coating for the electronics. These modules are suitable for use in adverse atmospheric conditions and are protected against condensation and corrosive gases. Data sheets can be found under 5 "Coated modules".
  • Page 75: X20 System Configuration

    2.20 X20 system configuration The X20 system is designed so that can be connected to standard fieldbuses (with a bus controller) or the remote X2X Link backplane (with a bus receiver). The connection to the next station is made with a bus transmitter. Supply modules and I/O modules are placed between the bus receiver or bus controller and the bus transmitter as needed.
  • Page 76: Fieldbus Connection

    Several bus controllers for standard fieldbus technologies like POWERLINK, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, CANopen, ModbusTCP or EtherNet/IP are available to connect X20 modules to existing control systems. Fieldbus configura- tors transparently integrate the X20 system into the 3rd-party development environment. Variable Figure 14: X20 system configurator for fieldbus connection...
  • Page 77: Connection To X2X Link Backplane

    System features 2.20.2 Connection to X2X Link backplane The bus receiver X20BR9300 is used to connect the X20 system directly to the remote X2X Link backplane. Variable Figure 15: X20 system configurator for connection to X2X Link backplane X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 78: Mechanical And Electrical Configuration

    3.1.1 X20 CPUs with one slot for interface modules +0.2 Figure 16: Dimensions of the X20 CPUs with one slot 3.1.2 X20 CPUs with three slots for interface modules +0.2 Figure 17: Dimensions of the X20 CPUs with three slots X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 79: Compact Cpus And Bus Controllers

    Figure 19: Dimensions of the fieldbus CPUs and expandable bus controller with one additional slot 3.1.4.2 With two additional slots +0.2 87.5 Figure 20: Dimensions of the fieldbus CPUs and expandable bus controller with two additional slots X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 80: I/O Modules

    To ensure CAD support, the dimensions are included in the ECAD macros in 2D. STEP data is available to allow 3D viewing. The STEP data can be found in the Downloads section of the B&R website at www.br-automation.com under the respective module. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 81: Design Support

    This saves time for the more important tasks and prevents errors right from the start. The accelerated development, programming, maintenance and documen- tation involved with the X20 system mean lower costs, enhanced quality and increased sales by earlier entry into the market.
  • Page 82: Installation

    For optimal cooling and air circulation, there must be at least 35 mm free space above the modules. To the left and right of the X20 system, there must be at least 10 mm of free space. Underneath the modules, 35 mm space must be left free for I/O and power supply cabling.
  • Page 83: Vertical Installation

    For optimal cooling and air circulation, there must be at least 35 mm free space to the left of the modules. Above and below the X20 system, there must be at least 10 mm of free space. To the right of the modules, 35 mm space must be left free for I/O and power supply cabling.
  • Page 84: Wiring

    3.5 Stress relief using cable ties Figure 25: Stress relief using cable ties The X20 system terminal blocks have slots for the cable ties. If needed, a cable tie can be fed through these slots to reduce the stress on the cable.
  • Page 85: Shielding

    (stress relief). Figure 27: Direct shielding connection Information: The ground connection should be made as short and with as little resistance as possible. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 86: X20 Cable Shield Clamp

    ① Figure 28: Shielding via X20 cable shield clamp To reduce the EMC emissions most effectively, the cable shield must be as long as possible after the cable tie (see ① in the diagram above). X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 87: X20 Shielding Bracket

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 3.6.3 X20 shielding bracket The X20 shielding bracket (model number X20AC0SF9.0010) is installed below the X20 system. The shield is pressed against the shielding bracket using ground terminals from another manufacturer (e.g. PHOENIX or WAGO) or a cable tie.
  • Page 88: Shielding Via Top-Hat Rail Or Bus Bar

    A different number of cables can be grounded together with a single terminal depending on the grounding terminals being used. To reduce the EMC emissions most effectively, the cable shield must be as long as possible after the cable tie (see ① in the diagram above). X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 89: Wiring Guidelines For X20 Modules With An Ethernet Cable

    Using POWERLINK cables offered by B&R (X20CA0E61.xxxx and X67CA0E41.xxxx) satisfies the EN 61131-2 product standard. For any further requirements, the customer must take additional measures. Wiring diagram ≥ ≥ Figure 30: Wiring diagram for X20 modules with an Ethernet cable X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 90: The Supply Concept

    Figure 31: The bus module replaces the rack in the X20 system The bus module is the backbone of the X20 system regarding the bus supply and bus data as well as the I/O supply for the electronics modules. Each bus module is an active bus station, even without an electronics module. There are two variations of the bus module: •...
  • Page 91: X20 System Infrastructure

    This makes it possible to implement simple potential groups (e.g. for input groups or different output groups). For isolation, the corresponding bus module is also necessary, which provides isolation of the internal I/O supply. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 92: Output Modules With Supply

    3.13 Bus receiver with supply The X20BR9300 bus receiver for the X20 system is equipped with a supply for X2X Link as well as for the internal I/O supply. This eliminates the need for an additional power supply module.
  • Page 93: X20 System Protection

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 3.19 X20 system protection The protection for the X20 system depends on the supply concept. 3.19.1 Potential groups Using the X20BM01 bus module and organizing the power supply bus modules accordingly allows various potential groups to be implemented (e.g. for input groups or various power circuits for the outputs).
  • Page 94: X2X Link Supply

    U2/24 VDC Figure 35: Example for extended X2X Link supply 1) Recommended for line protection. The X20PS3300 power supply module supplies both the X2X Link and I/O; the X20PS2100 power supply module only supplies the I/O. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 95: Example For Redundant X2X Link Supply

    1) Recommended for line protection. 2) With separate supplies, the two reference potentials (GND_1 and GND_2) are combined via the terminal block on the PS3300. The X20PS3300 power supply module supplies both X2X Link and the I/O. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 96: Safe Cutoff

    In this regard, sufficient language skills are also required in order to be able to properly understand this manual. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 97: Application In The X20 System

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 3.21.5 Application in the X20 system The operating principle applies to a potential group in the X20 system. For information about how to create a potential group in the X20 system, see section 3.11 "Potential groups".
  • Page 98: General Notices

    If the output is enabled from the functional application (shown in the sketch as the interval t ) during the worst-case time (<500 ms), then the output subsequently remains application enabled for the calculated time. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 99: Potential Group Structure

    Figure 38: Circuit example 1: "One-channel without feedback" Provided that the external components used (E-stop button, safety relay, load) satisfy the respective requirements, this example can achieve PL e (performance level as specified in ISO 13849). X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 100 Load E-stop +24 VDC Figure 41: Circuit example 3: With X20SP1130 power supply module and X20DO8332 Provided that the external components used (E-stop button, load) satisfy the respective requirements, this example can achieve PL e. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 101: Wiring Notices

    ° OR they are installed within an electrical enclosure (provided that both the conductors and the enclosure meet the appropriate requirements [see EN 60204-1 (IEC 60204-1)]) ° OR they are individually shielded with a ground connection X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 102: Safety Guidelines

    • The ground connections should be used as functional ground and not as protective ground and must not be connected to the 24 V supply voltage (GND is permitted). There must not be any protective components between the ground and the 24 V supply voltage. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 103: Combining X2X Link Systems

    I/O supply I/O supply 24 V 24 V Attachment cable Connection cables Open cables X67CA0P20.xxxx X67CA0P00.xxxx X67CA0P40.xxxx X67CA0P30.xxxx X67CA0P10.xxxx X67CA0P50.xxxx With 7XVxxx.xx-21 24 V Figure 43: Connection overview - Combining X20, X67 and valve terminal connections X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 104: Connection Examples

    X67CA0X41.xxxx X67CA0X51.xxxx X2X Link Out Attachment cable X67CA0X21.xxxx X67CA0X31.xxxx X2X Link in/out Cable for custom assembly, 100 m X67CA0X99.1000 Table 9: Compact I/O system - Connection example Bridge for X2X+ in connection with X67 modules. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 105: Valve Connection

    X2X Link Out Attachment cable X67CA0X21.xxxx X67CA0X31.xxxx X2X Link in/out Cable for custom assembly, 100 m X67CA0X99.1000 I/O supply Open cables X67CA0P40.xxxx X67CA0P50.xxxx Table 11: Connection example for valve connection (7XVxxx.xx-21) In connection with X67 modules. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 106: Calculating The Power Requirements

    When operated as a a bus transmitter bus transmitter and I/ O power supply module X20BT9100 -0.1 W +240 W -0.5 W X20BT9400 -0.1 W +240 W -0.5 W Table 13: Overview of bus transmitter power X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 107: Example 1

    I/O-internal power [W] I/O-external power [W] Sensor/Actuator supply [W] X20DI6371 0.15 0.88 X20DI6371 0.15 0.88 X20DI2377 0.15 0.82 12.00 Subtotal 2.58 12.00 Total 0.45 14.58 (= 2.58 + 12.00) Rated power at 24 VDC and 0.5 A. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 108 0.72 X20BT9100 0.50 0.10 Subtotal 4.12 Total 0.54 4.12 It is then necessary to perform a power comparison between the power needed by the I/O modules and the power supplied by the power supply modules. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 109 Rated power at 24 VDC and 10 A. Potential group 3 Power 24 VDC I/O supply [W] X20PS2100 +240.00 Power requirements of I/O modules -4.12 Remaining power +235.88 Rated power at 24 VDC and 10 A. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 110: Power Supply Module Power Loss

    3.24 Power supply module power loss 3.24.1 General information Power supply modules are used to provide power to an X20 system. The power supply modules are either a separate module or part of a CPU or a bus controller. The power consumed by the power supply modules is passed on to the X20 system, taking into consideration its own power requirements and the effectiveness of the power supplies.
  • Page 111: Power Supply Modules Without X2X Link Supply

    Table 15: Power consumption of power supply modules with X2X Link supply ΣP Sum of the bus power consumption of all modules in the X20 system (compact CPU, fieldbus CPU, BC, BR, I/O, BM, BT) n ... Number of all power supply modules in the X20 system with X2X Link supply, including X20BR9300 I/O summation current of all I/O modules supplied by this power supply module 3.24.4 Power supply module for X20 standalone devices...
  • Page 112: Example

    Bus power consumption of all modules in the X20 system The sum of the bus power consumption from all of the modules in the X20 system is necessary in order to calculate the internal X2X Link power consumption of the X20BR9300.
  • Page 113: Calculating The Internal I/O Power Consumption Of The X20Br9300

    Connections and currents of the first X20DO4322: 0.35 A 0.4 A 0.1 A 0.08 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.15 A 0.09 A +24 VDC +24 VDC Figure 45: Connections and currents of the first X20DO4322 X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 114 Calculating the I/O summation current The I/O summation current is calculated from the sum of all three partial currents. Calculating the internal I/O power consumption of the X20BR9300 The internal I/O power consumption is calculated using the following formula: X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 115: Total Internal Power Consumption Of The X20Br9300

    Calculating the I/O summation current The I/O summation current is calculated from the sum of all three partial currents. Calculating the internal I/O power consumption of the X20BR9300 The internal I/O power consumption is calculated using the following formula: X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 116: X20 System Modules

    X20 system modules • Module overview: Alphabetically 4 X20 system modules 4.1 Module overview: Alphabetically Product ID Short description on page 0ACS100A.00-1 Acceleration sensor, nominal sensitivity 100 mV/g, top exit 2204 0ACS100A.90-1 Acceleration sensor, nominal sensitivity 100 mV/g, side exit...
  • Page 117 X20 system modules • Module overview: Alphabetically Product ID Short description on page X20BB81 X20 bus base with 1 expansion slot for X20 base module (BC, HB, ...) and an X20 auxiliary module (IF, HB, ...) 1738 and X20 power supply module, X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 X20 end plates left and right included X20BB82 X20 bus base with 2 expansion slots for X20 base module (BC, HB, ...) and two X20 auxiliary modules (IF,...
  • Page 118 X20 system modules • Module overview: Alphabetically Product ID Short description on page X20CP1584 X20 CPU, ATOM 0.6 GHz, 512 MB DDR2 RAM, 1 MB SRAM, removable application memory: CompactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB ports, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100/1000 Base- T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 119 X20 system modules • Module overview: Alphabetically Product ID Short description on page X20DM9324 X20 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 VDC, sink, configurable input filter, 4 outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, source, 1056 1-wire connections X20DO2321 X20 digital output module, 2 outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, sink, 3-wire connections...
  • Page 120 X20 system modules • Module overview: Alphabetically Product ID Short description on page X20IF1091-1 X20 interface module for expandable bus controller, 1 X2X Link master interface, electrically isolated, order 1x 1742 TB704 terminal block separately. X20IF10A1-1 X20 interface module, for DTM configuration, 1 ASi master interface, electrically isolated, order 1x TB704 ter- 1833 minal block separately.
  • Page 121: Module Overview: Grouped

    X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped 4.2 Module overview: Grouped CPU modules Product ID Short description on page X20CP1483 X20 CPU, x86 100 MHz Intel compatible, 32 MB DRAM, 128 kB SRAM, removable application memory: Com- pactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 122 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped All modules Product ID Short description on page X20DO6325 X20 digital output module, 6 outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, source, open line and overload detection, 2-wire connec- 1210 tions Analog input modules X20AI1744...
  • Page 123 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped Product ID Short description on page X20BT9400 X20 bus transmitter X2X Link, feed for internal I/O supply, X2X Link supply for X67 modules, reverse polari- ty protection, short circuit protection, overload protection, parallel connection possible, redundancy operation...
  • Page 124 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped Product ID Short description on page X20DO6322 X20 digital output module, 6 outputs, 24 VDC, 0.5 A, source, 2-wire connections 1202 X20DO6529 X20 digital output module, 6 relays, normally open contacts, 115 VAC / 0.5 A, 30 VDC / 1 A...
  • Page 125 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped Product ID Short description on page X20HB2886 X20 hub expansion module, integrated active 2x hub, 2 fiber optic connections 2386 System modules for bus controllers X20BB80 X20 bus base for X20 base module (BC, HB, ...) and X20 supply module, X20AC0SL1/X20AC0SR1 X20 end...
  • Page 126 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped Product ID Short description on page X20CP1585 X20 CPU, ATOM 1.0 GHz, 512 MB DDR2 RAM, 1 MB SRAM, removable application memory: CompactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100/1000 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 127 X20 system modules • Module overview: Grouped Product ID Short description on page X20 redundancy systems X20HB8884 X20 compact link selector, 2x RJ45 connection, order bus base, power supply module and terminal block sep- 2353 arately. X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 128: Analog Input Modules

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • Brief information 4.3 Analog input modules Analog input modules convert measured values (voltages, currents) into numerical values, which can be processed by the PLC. In the PLC, analog data is always in 16-bit 2s complement regardless of the resolution. Therefore, the resolution of the module used does not have to be taken into consideration when creating an application program.
  • Page 129: X20Ai1744, X20Ai1744-3

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2 X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.1 General Information The X20AI1744 and X20AI1744-3 modules work with both 4-line and 6-line strain gauge cells. If a 6-line strain gauge cell is connected, the line compensation no longer functions. This module concept requires compensation in the measurement system.
  • Page 130 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 Product ID X20AI1744 X20AI1744-3 Connection 4- or 6-wire connections Input type Differential, used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge Digital converter resolution 24-bit Conversion time Depends on the configured data output rate Data output rate 2.5 - 7500 samples per second, configurable using software (f...
  • Page 131: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 Product ID X20AI1744 X20AI1744-3 Mechanical characteristics Note Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately Order 1x X20BM11 bus module separately Spacing 12.5 +0.2 Table 19: X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 - Technical data Depends on the full-bridge strain gauge used With 6-wire connections, line compensation does not function.
  • Page 132: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.6 Connection examples Full-bridge strain gauge with 4-line connection Full-bridge strain gauge ⊥ +24 VDC +24 VDC Figure 49: Connection example - Full-bridge strain gauge with 4-line connection Full-bridge strain gauge with 6-line connection Precision can be improved by using strain gauge cells with feedback of the bridge voltage.
  • Page 133: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 Parallel connection of 2 full-bridge strain gauges with 4-line connections For parallel connection of full-bridge strain gauges, please refer to the manufacturer's guidelines. Full-bridge strain gauge 1 Full-bridge strain gauge 2 ⊥...
  • Page 134: Filter Characteristics Of The Sigma-Delta Adc

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.8 Filter characteristics of the Sigma-Delta ADC 12 x 16 x 20 x 24 x 1 x f Frequency DATA 4.3.2.9 Effective resolution of the AD converter The AD converter on the AI1744 provides a 24 bit measurement value. However, the actual attainable noise-free resolution is always less than 24 bit.
  • Page 135: Calculation Example / Quantization

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.10 Calculation example / Quantization In a weighing application, the corresponding weight located on the connected load cell should be determined from the value derived from the X20AI1744. The characteristics of the strain gauge load cell are as follows: •...
  • Page 136: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11 Register description 4.3.2.11.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic StatusInput01 USINT ● AnalogInput01 DINT ● ConfigOutput01 USINT ● ConfigCycletime01 UINT ●...
  • Page 137 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11.4 Register for "Standard" and "Bus Controller" function model 4.3.2.11.4.1 Module status Name: StatusInput01 The current state of the module is indicated in this register. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 138 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 Measurement range ±256mV/V ±128mV/V ±64mV/V ±32mV/V Data rate [Hz] Bits Scope Bits Scope Bits Scope Bits Scope DATA ±4,194,000 22.6 ±3,179,000 22.1 ±2,248,000 21.7 ±1,703,000 22.3 ±2,582,000 22.4 ±2,767,000 21.9 ±1,957,000...
  • Page 139 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 Synchronous mode Beginning with firmware version 2, the analog/digital converter (ADC) on the X20AI1744 module can be operated and read synchronously with the X2X Link. Synchronous mode is activated by selecting the respective operating mode in the ADC configuration register.
  • Page 140 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11.4.5 ADC clock frequency shift Name: AdcClkFreqShift01 In rare cases, X20AI1744 connected to neighboring slots can influence one another. This can result in tempo- rary, minimal deviations in measurement values. This can only occur if the SigmaDelta ADCs on the neighboring X20AI1744 modules are operated at exactly the same clock frequency.
  • Page 141 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11.5 Register for "Multiple Sampling" function model 4.3.2.11.5.1 Module status Name: StatusInput01 The current state of the module is indicated in this register. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 142 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11.5.3 ADC configuration Name: ConfigOutput01 (X20AI1744) ConfigGain01_MultiSample (X20AI1744-3) The measurement range for the AD converter can be configured in this register. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure:...
  • Page 143 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI1744, X20AI1744-3 4.3.2.11.6 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 144: X20Ai2222

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 4.3.3 X20AI2222 4.3.3.1 General information The module is equipped with 2 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 V.
  • Page 145: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 Product ID X20AI2222 Output of the digital value during overload Below lower limit 0x8001 Above upper limit 0x7FFF Conversion procedure Input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 kHz Max. error at 25°C Gain 0.08%...
  • Page 146: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 4.3.3.5 Pinout AI + 1 U AI + 2 U AI - 1 U AI - 2 U Figure 54: Pinout 4.3.3.6 Connection example +24 VDC +24 VDC 4.3.3.7 Input circuit diagram...
  • Page 147: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 4.3.3.8 Register description 4.3.3.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Lower limit value ●...
  • Page 148 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 149 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 4.3.3.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 150 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 151 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2222 4.3.3.8.8 Upper limit value Name: ConfigOutput04 This register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corresponding error status bit is set.
  • Page 152: X20Ai2237

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4 X20AI2237 4.3.4.1 General information The X20AI2237 module is equipped with two voltage inputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. Each voltage input has its own sensor supply. The two channels with their respective sensor supplies are electrically isolated from each other.
  • Page 153 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 Product ID X20AI2237 Input protection Up to 30 VDC, reverse polarity protection Open line detection Yes, via software Permitted input signal Max. ±30 V Output of the digital value during overload...
  • Page 154: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.4 Status LEDs Image Color Status Description Operating status Green Module supply not connected Single flash Unlink mode Blinking quickly Sync mode Blinking slowly PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode Module status Module supply not connected or everything is OK...
  • Page 155: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.6 Connection examples 4.3.4.6.1 2-wire connection A 2-wire connection can be implemented as follows: • 2-wire transducer • Active voltage source 2-wire Transducer (passive) +24 VDC +24 VDC 4.3.4.6.2 4-wire connection A 4-wire connection can be implemented as follows: •...
  • Page 156: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.7 Input circuit diagram Electrical Isolation Sensor supply x + DC/DC Supply 28 V DC/DC 18 - 30 V Input Converter protection GND x GND I/O 25 V DC/DC DC/DC Sensor supply x - 3.3 V...
  • Page 157: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9 Register description 4.3.4.9.1 Register overview - Standard Registers Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog input - Configuration AnalogFilter01 UINT ● AnalogFilter02 AnalogMode01 UINT ● AnalogMode02 UpperLimit01 ●...
  • Page 158 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.2 Register overview - Bus controller Registers Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog input - Configuration AnalogFilter01 UINT ● AnalogFilter02 AnalogMode01 UINT ● AnalogMode02 UpperLimit01 ● UpperLimit02 LowerLimit01 ●...
  • Page 159 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.3 General information The X20AI2237 provides two electrically isolated channels. Each channel can read an electrical voltage signal in the ±10 V range, and the supply the signal encoder with 24 VDC.
  • Page 160 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 The "Level of input filter" limits the permissible changes to the input value. The calculation is recursive, which means the current value depends on the previously filtered input value. The curve of the filtered input value is similar to a first order low pass filter.
  • Page 161 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 The higher the filter level is set, the lower the absolute amplitude of the evaluated input value. Due to the recursive calculation, however, the spike has a considerable after-effect. It is therefore recommended to define an additional input limit when using high filter levels.
  • Page 162 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.4.1 AnalogFilter Name: AnalogFilter01 AnalogFilter02 If required by the application, the "AnalogFilter" register can be used to limit the slew rate of the input value. Data type Values UINT See bit structure...
  • Page 163 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.4.3 UpperLimit, LowerLimit Name: UpperLimit01 UpperLimit02 LowerLimit01 LowerLimit02 If the value range needs to be restricted further, the "UpperLimit" and "LowerLimit registers can be used to enter new user-specific limit values.
  • Page 164 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.4.6 PreparationInterval Name: PreparationInterval01 PreparationInterval02 If the last valid measurement value should be kept when violating the limit value, then PreparationInterval must be defined. The measurement values continue to be acquired and converted according to the configured I/O update time.
  • Page 165 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 4.3.4.9.5 Analog input - Communication The measured voltage data can be obtained via two different registers: The unevaluated measurement value ("measurand") contains the scaled converter value. The evaluated measurement value ("Evaluated“) also takes the limit values and the configured replacement value strategy into consideration.
  • Page 166 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2237 SensorErrorAnalogInput: In addition to the analog input, the module also provides the option of supplying the connected encoder with 24 VDC. If the input impedance for the sensor is too high, however, the integrated supply voltage will fail.
  • Page 167: X20Ai2322

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5 X20AI2322 4.3.5.1 General information The module is equipped with 2 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA.
  • Page 168: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 Product ID X20AI2322 Output of the digital value during overload Below lower limit 0x0000 Above upper limit 0x7FFF Conversion procedure Input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 kHz Max. error at 25°C...
  • Page 169: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5.5 Pinout AI +1 I AI +2 I AI -1 I AI -2 I Figure 65: Pinout 4.3.5.6 Connection example +24 VDC +24 VDC 4.3.5.7 Input circuit diagram AI + x I...
  • Page 170: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5.8 Register description 4.3.5.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Channel type USINT ●...
  • Page 171 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 172 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 173 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 174 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5.8.7 Channel type Name: ConfigOutput02 This register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: •...
  • Page 175 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2322 4.3.5.8.10 Input status Name: StatusInput01 This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 176: X20Ai2437

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6 X20AI2437 4.3.6.1 General information The X20AI2437 module is equipped with two inputs that have 16-bit digital converter resolution. Each current measurement input has its own sensor supply. The two channels with their respective sensor supplies are electrically isolated from each other.
  • Page 177: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.3 Technical data Product ID X20AI2437 Short description I/O module 2 analog inputs, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 25 mA General information B&R ID code 0xB784 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status, sensor supply per channel...
  • Page 178: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 Product ID X20AI2437 Maximum voltage ripple Up to 100 kHz ≤2.2 mV Up to 1 MHz ≤22 mV higher ≤100 mV Short circuit current Typical <50 mA Maximum 60 mA Behavior in the event of a short circuit...
  • Page 179: Pin Assignments

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.5 Pin assignments Shielded twisted pair cables are generally used to minimize disturbance. Use either one cable for each channel or a multiple twisted pair cable for both channels. Sensor supply 1 + Channel 1 + Sensor supply 1 −...
  • Page 180: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9 Register description 4.3.6.9.1 Register overview - Function model 0 (standard) Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Channel 1 (electrically isolated) Analog signal - Communication AnalogInputEvaluated01 ●...
  • Page 181 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.2 Variable assignment in Automation Studio (X2X master) Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Channel 1 (electrically isolated) Analog signal - Communication AnalogStatus01 USINT ● UnderflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ●...
  • Page 182 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.3 Register overview - Bus controller function model 254 Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Channel 1 (electrically isolated) Analog signal - Communication AnalogInputEvaluated01 ● UINT AnalogStatus01 USINT ●...
  • Page 183 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.4 Variable assignment in Automation Studio (CANIO) Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Channel 1 (electrically isolated) Analog signal - Communication AnalogStatus01 USINT ● UnderflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ● OverflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ●...
  • Page 184 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.5 Analog signal - Communication The X20AI2437 module has two independent electrically isolated channels. Both channels can be used to read in an analog signal. Two registers need to be configured for one analog signal. The two channels operate independently, so two registers must be configured per channel to be used.
  • Page 185 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.5.3 AnalogSampletime Names (pChannelName): AnalogSampletime01 AnalogSampletime01_16Bit AnalogSampletime01_32Bit AnalogSampletime02 AnalogSampletime02_16Bit AnalogSampletime02_32Bit The registers return the timestamp for when the module reads the current channel mapping. The values are pro- vided as signed 2-byte or 4-byte values.
  • Page 186 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 Open line: According to the configuration, measurement information is checked for values <2 mA ("OpenLoopLimit" register) to detect a failure signal. Open line detection takes place using a configurable hysteresis value (default: 100 µA, "Hysteresis"...
  • Page 187 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.6 Analog signal - Configuration How the analog signal is displayed can be adapted to the requirements of the application. Separate configuration registers per channel are available to aid in this.
  • Page 188 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.6.3 OpenLoopLimit Names (pChannelName): OpenLoopLimit_1 OpenLoopLimit_2 The limit value for the respective analog input must be set when open circuit monitoring is enabled and if required by the configured normalization. If limit value monitoring is active, the corresponding error status is output after a configured delay when falling below this value.
  • Page 189 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.6.5 ReplacementUpper, ReplacementLower Names (pChannelName): ReplacementUpper_1 ReplacementUpper_2 ReplacementLower_1 ReplacementLower_2 The "Replace" registers are used to predefine the static values that will be displayed instead of the current mea- surement value when a limit value is violated.
  • Page 190 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.6.6 UpperLimit, LowerLimit Names (pChannelName): UpperLimit_1 UpperLimit_2 LowerLimit_1 LowerLimit_2 If the value range needs to be restricted further, the "UpperLimit" and "LowerLimit registers can be used to enter new user-specific limit values.
  • Page 191 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.6.8 ErrorDelay Names (pChannelName): ErrorDelay_1 ErrorDelay_2 This register specifies the number of consecutive conversion procedures where an error is pending until the cor- responding individual error status bit is set. The delay applies to underflow, overflow and open circuit errors. This delay can be used to hide temporary measurement value deviations, for example.
  • Page 192 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2437 4.3.6.9.7 Function models Name Number Automation CANopen DeviceNet Modbus/TCP CANIO Studio Standard function model ● Bus controller function model ● ● ● ● A function model specifies the registers on the module (storage model) that are available for the application. Only these registers are processed on the module during each cycle and transferred cyclically via the bus.
  • Page 193: X20Ai2438

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7 X20AI2438 4.3.7.1 General information The X20AI2438 module is equipped with two inputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. It supports the HART communication standard for data transfer, parameter configuration and diagnostics.
  • Page 194: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.3 Technical data Product ID X20AI2438 Short description I/O module 2 analog inputs, 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 25 mA General information B&R ID code 0xB3A9 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status, sensor supply per channel, HART...
  • Page 195 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Product ID X20AI2438 Short circuit protection Yes, continuous Electrical isolation Sensor supply - Channel Sensor supply - Sensor supply Maximum voltage ripple Up to 100 kHz ≤2.2 mV Up to 1 MHz ≤22 mV...
  • Page 196: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.4 Status LEDs Image Color Status Description Operating mode Green Module supply not connected Single flash Unlink mode Blinking quickly Sync mode Blinking slowly PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode Module status Module supply not connected or everything is OK Single flash A conversion error has occurred.
  • Page 197: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.6 Connection examples 4.3.7.7 Input circuit diagram Electrical Isolation Sensor supply x + DC/DC Supply 28 V DC/DC 18 - 30 V Output Converter protection GND x GND I/O 25 V DC/DC 3.3 V...
  • Page 198: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9 Register description 4.3.7.9.1 Register overview - Function model 0 (standard) Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog signal - Communication channel 01 AnalogInputEvaluated01 ● ● UINT...
  • Page 199 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic HART - Communication channel 02 1074 + PvNodeComStatus02_01 UINT ● Index*4 PvNodeComStatus02_[02…15] 1114 + PvSampleTime02_01_16bit Index*24 PvSampleTime02_[02…15]_16bit ● ● 1116 +...
  • Page 200 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.2 Variable assignment in Automation Studio (X2X master) Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog signal - Communication channel 01 AnalogStatus01 USINT ● UnderflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ● OverflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ●...
  • Page 201 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.3 Register overview - Function model 254 (bus controller) Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog signal - Communication channel 01 AnalogInputEvaluated01 ● UINT AnalogStatus01 USINT ●...
  • Page 202 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Heading Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic PvCountHartFrameError01 UINT ● PvNodeFound01 UINT ● PvNodeError01 UINT ● 1546 HartProtTimeOut_1 UINT ● 1550 HartProtRetry_1 UINT ● 1554 HartPreamble_1 UINT ●...
  • Page 203 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.4 Variable assignment in Automation Studio (CANIO) Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Analog signal - Communication channel 01 AnalogStatus01 USINT ● UnderflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ● OverflowAnalogInput01 BOOL ●...
  • Page 204 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.5 General information The X20AI2438 module has two independent electrically isolated channels with integrated HART modems. Both channels can be used to read in an analog signal and handle HART communication. Two registers need to be configured for one analog signal.
  • Page 205 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.6 Analog signal - Communication 4.3.7.9.6.1 AnalogInputEvaluated Names (pChannelName): AnalogInputEvaluated01 AnalogInputEvaluated02 These registers take the values from the "AnalogInput" registers and use them to generate the evaluated input values. The configured auxiliary functions are applied to form these values.
  • Page 206 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.6.3 AnalogStatus Names (pChannelName): AnalogStatus01 AnalogStatus02 The current error status of the module channels is displayed in this register, regardless of the configured replace- ment value strategy. Some error information may be delayed according to the previously configured condition.
  • Page 207 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 I/O supply error: This error is activated immediately as soon as the module detects that the necessary supply voltage is no longer being provided (<20 VDC). 4.3.7.9.6.4 AnalogSampletime Names (pChannelName): AnalogSampletime01...
  • Page 208 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.7 Analog signal - Configuration How the analog signal is displayed can be adapted to the requirements of the application. Separate configuration registers per channel are available to aid in this.
  • Page 209 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.7.3 OpenLoopLimit Names (pChannelName): OpenLoopLimit_1 OpenLoopLimit_2 The limit value for the respective analog input must be set when open circuit monitoring is enabled and if required by the configured normalization. If limit value monitoring is active, the corresponding error status is output after a configured delay when falling below this value.
  • Page 210 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.7.5 ReplacementUpper, ReplacementLower Names (pChannelName): ReplacementUpper_1 ReplacementUpper_2 ReplacementLower_1 ReplacementLower_2 The "Replace" registers are used to predefine the static values that will be displayed instead of the current mea- surement value when a limit value is violated.
  • Page 211 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.7.6 UpperLimit, LowerLimit Names (pChannelName): UpperLimit_1 UpperLimit_2 LowerLimit_1 LowerLimit_2 If the value range needs to be restricted further, the "UpperLimit" and "LowerLimit registers can be used to enter new user-specific limit values.
  • Page 212 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.7.7 Hysteresis Names (pChannelName): Hysteres_1 Hysteres_2 If the user-specific limit values are being used, then a hysteresis range should also be defined. The "Hysteresis" registers configure how far a limit value can be exceeded before a response is triggered.
  • Page 213 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.8 HART HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a protocol for communicating with intelligent field devices. It was developed in order to more efficiently use the infrastructure for transferring analog signals. The digital HART notifications are modulated to the analog signal using Frequency Shift Keying (FSK).
  • Page 214 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.8.1 HART - Register names (pChannelName) • HART configuration: HartNodeCnt_1 HartNodeCnt_2 HartBurstNode_1 HartBurstNode_2 HartMode_1 HartMode_2 • HART communication: PvInput01_[01...15] PvInput02_[01...15] PvUnit01_[01...15] PvUnit02_[01...15] PvSampleTime01_[01...15] PvSampleTime01_[01...15]_16bit PvSampleTime01_[01...15]_32bit PvSampleTime02_[01...15] PvSampleTime02_[01...15]_16bit PvSampleTime02_[01...15]_32bit PvNodeComStatus01_[01...15] PvNodeComStatus02_[01...15] PvCountHartRequest01...
  • Page 215 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.8.2 HART - Configuration HART modules are analog modules equipped with a HART modem. For each channel, a separate HART network can be managed by the module, which acts as a primary master. Once configured successfully, the HART infor- mation is stored in the module where it can then be used by the PLC.
  • Page 216 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.8.3 HART - Communication Once the configuration has been completed, the information is retrieved automatically and transferred to the module's registers. A separate register in the module is implemented for each piece of information. HART modules are designed to retrieve up to 15 pieces of information per channel.
  • Page 217 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 PvSampleTime The registers return the timestamp for when the module reads the current channel mapping. The values are pro- vided as signed 2-byte or 4-byte values. Data type Values [µs] -32768 to 32767: Nettime timestamp of the current input value...
  • Page 218 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 PvCountHartRequest The "PvCountHartRequest" registers are increased once the module is ready to transmit a message to the corre- sponding channel. Data type Values UINT 0 to 65535 PvCountHartTimeout The "PvCountHartTimeout" registers are increased if the slave exceeds the maximum permitted time before re- sponding to the module's request.
  • Page 219 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 PvNodeFound The "PvNodeFound" registers provide information about which nodes were detected on which channel (slave identified successfully). Data type Values UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Information Node 0 (default mode)
  • Page 220 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.8.4 Extended configuration The additional configuration registers are specified values when the module is started. In most systems, the user does not need to make any adjustments here. Register values should only be changed if HART network commu- nication is not taking place satisfactorily.
  • Page 221 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.9 FlatStream communication 4.3.7.9.9.1 Introduction B&R offers an additional communication method for some modules. "FlatStream" was designed for X2X and POWERLINK networks and allows data transmission to be adapted to individual demands. Although this method is not 100% real-time capable, it still allows data transmission to be handled more efficiently than with standard cyclic polling.
  • Page 222 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.9.2 Message, segment, sequence, MTU The physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With FlatStream communication, all messages are viewed as part of a continuous data stream. Long data streams must be broken down into several fragments that are sent one after the other.
  • Page 223 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.9.3 The FlatStream principle Requirements: Before FlatStream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.e. both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence counter on the opposite station. This checks to see if there is new data that should be accepted.
  • Page 224 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.9.4 Registers for FlatStream mode Five registers are available for configuring FlatStream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: The CPU communicates directly with the field device via the OutputSequence/InputSequence registers and the enabled Tx / Rx bytes.
  • Page 225 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 FlatStream operation When using FlatStream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the Tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("input" direction), the Rx bytes are used.
  • Page 226 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 OutputSequence The "OutputSequence" register contains information about the communication status of the CPU. It is written by the CPU and read by the module. Data type Value USINT See bit structure...
  • Page 227 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 InputSequence The "InputSequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the CPU. Data type Value USINT...
  • Page 228 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Synchronization During synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the SequenceCounter is stored on the station receiving the message.
  • Page 229 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Transmitting and receiving If a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit array in order to meet FlatStream requirements.
  • Page 230 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 A unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the C0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C0 (control byte 0) C1 (control byte 1)
  • Page 231 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Transmitting data to a module (output) When transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using FlatStream and received by the module.
  • Page 232 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Message larger than the OutputMTU: The transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the array elements one after the other. The transfer algorithm remains the same and is repeated starting at the point Cyclic checks.
  • Page 233 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Receiving data from a module (input) When receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via FlatStream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming data stream can be configured with the mode register.
  • Page 234 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 General flow chart: Start ► InputSequenceAck = InputSequenceCounter InputSyncBit = 1? ► RemainingSegmentSize = 0 ► SegmentFlags = 0 InputSyncAck = 1? InputSequenceAck > 0? MTU_Offset = 0 InputSyncAck = 1 (InputSequenceCounter –...
  • Page 235 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Details It is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set MessageEndBit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then complete and can be passed on internally for further processing. A new/separate array should be created for the next message.
  • Page 236 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 FlatStream mode register In the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arrangement. Once enabled, the program code for evaluation must be adapted accordingly.
  • Page 237 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 MultiSegmentMTUs allowed: With this option, the InputMTU is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled Rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enabled Rx bytes to be used more efficiently.
  • Page 238 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Using both options: It is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 Bus cycle 2 Bus cycle 3 Segment 2 Segment 1 Segment 3 Message 1...
  • Page 239 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 FlatStream adjustment If the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier on.
  • Page 240 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 A unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the C0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C1 (control byte 1) C2 (control byte 2)
  • Page 241 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Large segments: Segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active MTU. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequences to be completely filled with payload data and not have a control byte.
  • Page 242 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Large segments and MultiSegmentMTU: Example: Three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an MTU with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segments as well as MultiSegmentMTUs.
  • Page 243 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.9.5 Example of Forward functionality on X2X Link Forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the FlatStream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical areas such as "pipelining" for microprocessors.
  • Page 244 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Configuration The Forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. FlatStream modules have been optimized in such a way that they support this function. In the output direction, the Forward function can be used as soon as the size of the OutputMTU is specified.
  • Page 245 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Transmitting and receiving with Forward The basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the Forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can be transmitted without having to wait for the previous message to be acknowledged.
  • Page 246 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Details/Background: 1. Illegal SequenceCounter size (counter offset) Error situation: MTU not enabled If the difference between SequenceCounter and SequenceAck is larger than allowed during transmission, then a transmission error has occurred. In this case, all unacknowledged sequences must be repeated with the old SequenceCounter value.
  • Page 247 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 Errors when using Forward In industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of these technical devices can sometimes cause them to interfere with one another.
  • Page 248 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2438 4.3.7.9.10 HART with FlatStream When using FlatStream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the X2X master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. FlatStream mode can be used for either point-to-point connections as well as for multidrop systems.
  • Page 249: X20Ai2622

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8 X20AI2622 4.3.8.1 General information The module is equipped with 2 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 250: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.3 Technical data Product ID X20AI2622 Short description I/O module 2 analog inputs ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA General information B&R ID code 0x1B9E...
  • Page 251: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 Product ID X20AI2622 Crosstalk between channels <-70 dB Non-linearity Voltage <0.025% Current <0.05% Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V Operating conditions Mounting orientation Horizontal Vertical Installation at altitudes above sea level...
  • Page 252: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.5 Pinout AI + 1 I AI + 2 I AI + 1 U AI + 2 U AI - 1 U/I AI - 2 U/I Figure 91: Pinout 4.3.8.6 Connection example...
  • Page 253: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.8 Register description 4.3.8.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic AnalogInput01 ● AnalogInput02 ● ConfigOutput01 USINT ● ConfigOutput02 USINT ● ConfigOutput03 ●...
  • Page 254 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 255 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 Adjustable filter levels: Value Filter level Filter switched off Filter level 2 Filter level 4 Filter level 8 Filter level 16 Filter level 32 Filter level 64 Filter level 128 The following examples show how filtering works in the event of an input jump or disturbance.
  • Page 256 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.8.6 Configuring the input filter Name: ConfigOutput01 This register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 257 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.8.8 Limit values The input signal is monitored at the upper and lower limit values. These must be defined according to the operating mode: Limit value (default) Voltage signal ±10 V...
  • Page 258 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI2622 4.3.8.8.9 Input status Name: StatusInput01 This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. The following states are monitored depending on the settings: Value Voltage signal ±10 V...
  • Page 259: X20Ai4222

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 4.3.9 X20AI4222 4.3.9.1 General information The module is equipped with 4 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 V.
  • Page 260: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 Product ID X20AI4222 Max. error at 25°C Gain 0.08% Offset 0.015% Max. gain drift 0.006 %/°C Max. offset drift 0.002 %/°C Common-mode rejection 70 dB 50 Hz 70 dB Common-mode range ±12 V...
  • Page 261: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 4.3.9.5 Pinout AI + 1 U AI + 2 U AI - 1 U AI - 2 U AI + 3 U AI + 4 U AI - 3 U AI - 4 U Figure 96: Pinout 4.3.9.6 Connection example...
  • Page 262: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 4.3.9.8 Register description 4.3.9.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Lower limit value ●...
  • Page 263 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 264 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 4.3.9.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 265 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 266 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4222 4.3.9.8.8 Upper limit value Name: ConfigOutput04 This register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corresponding error status bit is set.
  • Page 267: X20Ai4322

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10 X20AI4322 4.3.10.1 General information The module is equipped with 4 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA.
  • Page 268: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 Product ID X20AI4322 Max. error at 25°C Gain 0 to 20 mA 0.08% 4 to 20 mA 0.1% Offset 0 to 20 mA 0.03% 4 to 20 mA 0.16% Max. gain drift 0 to 20 mA 0.009 %/°C...
  • Page 269: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10.5 Pinout AI + 1 I AI + 2 I AI - 1 I AI - 2 I AI + 3 I AI + 4 I AI - 3 I AI - 4 I Figure 102: Pinout 4.3.10.6 Connection example...
  • Page 270: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10.8 Register description 4.3.10.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Channel type USINT ●...
  • Page 271 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 272 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 273 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 274 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10.8.7 Channel type Name: ConfigOutput02 This register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: •...
  • Page 275 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4322 4.3.10.8.10 Input status Name: StatusInput01 This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 276: X20Ai4622

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11 X20AI4622 4.3.11.1 General information The module is equipped with 4 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 277: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.3 Technical data Product ID X20AI4622 Short description I/O module 4 analog inputs ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA General information B&R ID code 0x1BAA...
  • Page 278: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 Product ID X20AI4622 Crosstalk between channels <-70 dB Non-linearity Voltage <0.025% Current <0.05% Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V Operating conditions Mounting orientation Horizontal Vertical Installation at altitudes above sea level...
  • Page 279: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.5 Pinout AI + 1 I AI + 2 I AI + 1 U AI + 2 U AI - 1 U/I AI - 2 U/I AI + 3 I AI + 4 I...
  • Page 280: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.8 Register description 4.3.11.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic AnalogInput01 ● AnalogInput02 ● AnalogInput03 ● AnalogInput04 ● ConfigOutput01 USINT ● ConfigOutput02 USINT ●...
  • Page 281 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 282 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 Adjustable filter levels: Value Filter level Filter switched off Filter level 2 Filter level 4 Filter level 8 Filter level 16 Filter level 32 Filter level 64 Filter level 128 The following examples show how filtering works in the event of an input jump or disturbance.
  • Page 283 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.8.6 Configuring the input filter Name: ConfigOutput01 This register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 284 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.8.8 Limit values The input signal is monitored at the upper and lower limit values. These must be defined according to the operating mode: Limit value (default) Voltage signal ±10 V...
  • Page 285 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI4622 4.3.11.8.9 Input status Name: StatusInput01 This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. The following states are monitored depending on the settings: Value Voltage signal ±10 V...
  • Page 286: X20Ai8221

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 4.3.12 X20AI8221 4.3.12.1 General information The module is equipped with 8 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 V.
  • Page 287: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 Product ID X20AI8221 Conversion procedure Input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 kHz Max. error at 25°C Gain 0.08% Offset 0.015% Max. gain drift 0.006 %/°C Max. offset drift 0.002 %/°C...
  • Page 288: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 4.3.12.5 Pinout AI + 1 U AI− 1 U AI + 2 U AI− 2 U AI + 3 U AI− 3 U AI + 4 U AI− 4 U AI + 5 U AI−...
  • Page 289: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 4.3.12.8 Register description 4.3.12.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Lower limit value ●...
  • Page 290 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 291 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 4.3.12.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 292 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 293 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8221 4.3.12.8.8 Upper limit value Name: ConfigOutput04 This register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corresponding error status bit is set.
  • Page 294: X20Ai8321

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13 X20AI8321 4.3.13.1 General information The module is equipped with 8 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA.
  • Page 295: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 Product ID X20AI8321 Input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 kHz Max. error at 25°C Gain 0 to 20 mA 0.08% 4 to 20 mA 0.1% Offset 0 to 20 mA 0.03%...
  • Page 296: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13.5 Pinout AI + 1 I AI− 1 I AI + 2 I AI− 2 I AI + 3 I AI− 3 I AI + 4 I AI− 4 I AI + 5 I AI−...
  • Page 297: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13.8 Register description 4.3.13.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration Configuring the input filter USINT ● Channel type UINT ●...
  • Page 298 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 Input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 The input value jumps from 8,000 to 17,000.
  • Page 299 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13.8.5.2 Filter level A filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles.
  • Page 300 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 Example 2 A disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: Input ramp limitation = 0 Filter level = 2 or 4 Input value...
  • Page 301 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13.8.7 Channel type Name: ConfigOutput02 This register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: •...
  • Page 302 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AI8321 4.3.13.8.10 Input status Name: StatusInput01 to StatusInput02 This register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 303: X20Ap31X1

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14 X20AP31x1 4.3.14.1 General information Power monitoring These modules measure active, reactive and apparent power individually for each of the three phases and for all of them collectively. The power consumption of each phase and the total sum is also recorded. In addition, the modules provide the RMS values for voltage and current on the three phases.
  • Page 304: Order Data

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.2 Order data Model number Short description Analog input modules X20AP3111 X20 energy measurement module, 3 analog inputs 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4 analog inputs 20 mA AC, calculates effective, reactive and apparent power/energy, calculates root mean square values,...
  • Page 305 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Product ID X20AP3111 X20AP3121 X20AP3131 X20AP3161 Max. display value 655 VAC Resolution 10 mV, with voltage connected directly Rated frequency 50 and 60 Hz Current inputs Quantity 4 AC inputs 4 AC voltage inputs...
  • Page 306: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Operating status Green No power to module Single flash UNLINK mode Double flash BOOT mode (during firmware update) Blinking quickly SYNC mode Blinking slowly...
  • Page 307: Current Transformer

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.6 Current transformer Potential-free measurement of the AC current requires a current transformer. The current transformer is a trans- ducer that delivers a secondary signal proportional to the primary current. This secondary signal is measured by the module.
  • Page 308: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.8 Input circuit diagram AC voltage inputs Protective impedance Anti-aliasing filter Input value U Lx transformer Filter Figure 128: Input circuit diagram of voltage inputs AC current inputs AP3111, AP3121, AP3131: (Current measurement)
  • Page 309: Typical Connection Examples For Different Mains Configurations

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.9 Typical connection examples for different mains configurations General information There are many different mains configurations around the world. This section will present a few typical connection examples. Connection example 1 - Mains A This example involves a 3-element, 3-phase, 4-line star measurement with grounded neutral conductor and optional fault current detection.
  • Page 310 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Connection example 3 - Mains C This example involves a 3-element, 3-phase, 3-line star measurement with grounded neutral conductor and optional fault current detection. U L1 U L2 U L3 I L1a...
  • Page 311 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Connection example 5 - Mains E This example involves a 2-element, 2-phase, 3-line star measurement with grounded neutral line conductor. U L1 U L2 U L3 I L1a I L1b I L2a...
  • Page 312 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Connection example 7 - Mains G This example involves a 3-element, 3-phase, 4-line delta measurement with grounded neutral. Information: The maximum voltage value specified in the data sheet must not be exceeded!
  • Page 313: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10 Register description 4.3.14.10.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Standard register PmeanT ● QmeanT ● SmeanT ● AEnergyT DINT ● REnergyT DINT ●...
  • Page 314 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic QmeanA ● QmeanB ● QmeanC ● SmeanT ● SmeanA ● SmeanB ● SmeanC ● PFmeanT ● PFmeanA ● PFmeanB ● PFmeanC ●...
  • Page 315 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic 1378 UGainC_W UINT ● 1382 IGainC_W UINT ● 1386 UoffsetC_W ● 1390 IoffsetC_W ● 1394 IGainN_W UINT ● 1398 IoffsetN_W ●...
  • Page 316 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Oversampling buffer Oversampling array[16]: Oversampling line 6146 + IactN_SampleN (Index N = 1 to 16) ● ((16-N)*40) 6150 + IactA_SampleN (Index N = 1 to 16) ●...
  • Page 317 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Standard register PmeanT ● QmeanT ● SmeanT ● 4404 AEnergyT DINT ● 4412...
  • Page 318 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic QmeanC ● SmeanT ● SmeanA ● SmeanB ● SmeanC ● PFmeanT ● PFmeanA ● PFmeanB ● PFmeanC ● Analog energy registers...
  • Page 319 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic 1386 UoffsetC_W ● 1390 IoffsetC_W ● 1394 IGainN_W UINT ● 1398 IoffsetN_W ● ADC power calibration – read 1758 PhiA_R UINT ●...
  • Page 320 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.3 General information The modules are used for power monitoring and for a machine's energy management. Examples of where this would be used: • Multi-phase energy measurement for class 0.5S or class 1 for °...
  • Page 321 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Energy measurement The power measurement (energy measurement) is based on the integration of the measured values with a sampling rate of 1 MHz. The collected energy values are made available as energy pulses with an adjustable resolution of 0.1 CF or 0.01 CF values in the energy registers and with a resolution of 1 CF on the CF status flags.
  • Page 322 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 The user can configure which one to use for displaying the status. Phase angle The phase angle is calculated based on the zero-crossing detection. Frequency Frequency measurement is based on Phase A. If A fails, then Phase C is used. If both A and C fail, then Phase B is used.
  • Page 323 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.3.4 Event generation Zero-crossing detection Zero-crossing detection can be configured for each phase for cu or voltage and edge and forms the basis for frequency and angle measurements and subsequently also for active and reactive power calculations.
  • Page 324 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Detection of voltage dip or power failure Event Description Voltage dip The threshold for voltage dips is typically set to 78% of the standard voltage (approx. 170 Vrms). The status flag is set if more than three 8 kHz samples are below the threshold value within 2 consecutive 11 ms windows.
  • Page 325 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.4 Interface for transferring process variable mapping Due to the amount of potential cyclic input data and the limitation to 30 byte cyclic X2X data, the extended Flat Stream interface, DPS = Data Point Stream, has been defined as the mechanism for transferring the process variables.
  • Page 326 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 ADC_REG_STATUS typedef struct ADC_REG_STATUS ADC_REG_STATUS; struct ADC_REG_STATUS unsigned short SysStatus0; // System Status 0 unsigned short SysStatus1; // System Status 1 unsigned short EnStatus0; // Metering Status 0 unsigned short EnStatus1;...
  • Page 327 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 ADC_REG_THD_ANGLE typedef struct ADC_REG_THD_ANGLE ADC_REG_THD_ANGLE; struct ADC_REG_THD_ANGLE // THD+N, Frequency, Angle and Temperature Registers unsigned short THDNUA; // phase A voltage THD+N unsigned short THDNUB; // phase B voltage THD+N unsigned short THDNUC;...
  • Page 328 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 ADC_REG_DFT typedef struct ADC_REG_DFT ADC_REG_DFT; struct ADC_REG_DFT // Arithmetic ratio, 2 bits integer and 14 bits fractional; // That is: Harmonic Ratio (%) = Register Value / 163.84 unsigned short DftAI[32];...
  • Page 329 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.5 Standard register 4.3.14.10.5.1 Total active power Name: PmeanT The value in the register equals a fourth of the actual power. The calculation can be performed in either absolute or arithmetic mode (see register "MeteringMode" <Bit 3>). Each phase can be separately enabled for the power calculation (see register "MeteringMode"...
  • Page 330 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.5.6 Status signals and responses Name: StatusInput The signals are recorded in 200 µs intervals. Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Value Information CF1 energy pulse 1, total active energy...
  • Page 331 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.6 Analog status registers 4.3.14.10.6.1 Read timestamp for I/O register (+0x0022 = 16 bit) Name: SampleTime01_32bit Network timestamp for the readout of the status, RMS, power register. Data type Value Information...
  • Page 332 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.6.3 ADC system status 2 Name: SysStatus2 Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Value Information RevPchgC, the direction of the active energy for phase C has No change of direction...
  • Page 333 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.6.5 ADC system status 4 Name: SysStatus4 Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Value Information LossPhaseC, voltage lower than value in the register Voltage is higher "PhaseLoseTh"...
  • Page 334 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.6.8 Phase status Name: PhaseStatus This register corresponds to the SysStatus4 register. It contains the status of phases A, B und C. Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure:...
  • Page 335 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.7 Analog RMS registers 4.3.14.10.7.1 Current RMS neutral line measured Name: IrmsN Measured value of the neutral current between the P and N connections on the current terminal, multiplied with the transfer factor of the transformer.
  • Page 336 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.8 Analog THD and angle registers 4.3.14.10.8.1 THD+N value voltage phase A/B/C Name: THDNUA THDNUB THDNUC Data type Value Information UINT 0 to 10000 Resolution 0.01% Harmonic content = (SQR(Rms ^2 - Rms...
  • Page 337 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.9 Analog power register 4.3.14.10.9.1 Vector sum of the total apparent power LSW Name: SVmeanTLSB The value in the register equals a fourth of the actual power. Data type Value Information...
  • Page 338 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.9.6 Reactive power on phase A/B/C Name: QmeanA QmeanB QmeanC Reactive power on the phase. Each phase can be separately enabled for the power calculation (see register "MeteringMode" <Bits 0, 1 and 2>).
  • Page 339 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.9.12 Fundamental wave active power on phase A/B/C Name: PmeanAF PmeanBF PmeanCF Active power of fundamental wave on the phase. Data type Value Information -32,767 to 32,767 Resolution 1 W 4.3.14.10.9.13 Total active power of harmonics...
  • Page 340 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10 Analog energy registers 4.3.14.10.10.1 Read timestamp for energy registers (+0x0022 = 16 bit) Name: SampleTime02_32bit Network timestamp for the readout of the energy register. Data type Value Information DINT -2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647 Network time 4.3.14.10.10.2 Forward total active energy...
  • Page 341 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.5 Reverse active energy on phase A/B/C Name: ANenergyA ANenergyB ANenergyC Active energy in reverse direction of the phase. Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g. kWs) Comments: •...
  • Page 342 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.8 Reverse total reactive energy Name: RNenergyT Total reactive energy in reverse direction. Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g. kWs) Comments: •...
  • Page 343 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.11 Apparent energy on phase A/B/C Name: SenergyA SenergyB SenergyC Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g. kWs) Comments: •...
  • Page 344 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.14 Forward fundamental wave active energy on phase A/B/C Name: APenergyAF APenergyBF APenergyCF Fundamental wave of active energy in forward direction of the phase. Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g.
  • Page 345 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.17 Forward harmonics total active energy Name: APenergyTH Harmonics of total active energy in forward direction. Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g. kWs) Comments: •...
  • Page 346 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.10.20 Reverse harmonics active energy on phase A/B/C Name: ANenergyAH ANenergyBH ANenergyCH Harmonics of active energy in reverse direction of the phase. Data type Value Information UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 Resolution 0.1 or 0.01 CF, depending on the Power Line factor (e.g. kWs) Comments: •...
  • Page 347 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.11 Analog DFT registers 4.3.14.10.11.1 Read timestamp for DFT register (+0x0022 = 16 bit) Name: SampleTime03_32bit Network timestamp for the readout of the DFT register. Data type Value Information DINT -2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647 Network time 4.3.14.10.11.2 Current HRn register for phase A/B/C...
  • Page 348 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.12 Module configuration 4.3.14.10.12.1 Analog mode register Name: ChanControl Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Value Information Channel status LED for phase A Disabled Enabled Channel status LED for phase B...
  • Page 349 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.12.3 Current transformer rating phase A/B/C/N Name: I_RatioA I_RatioB I_RatioC I_RatioN Data type Value Information UINT 10 to x Current transformer rating In the modules AP311, 21 and 31, the rated current is multiplied by the rated transformation ratio. In the module AP3161, the maximum primary current of the transformer is configured directly.
  • Page 350 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.13 ADC status configuration 4.3.14.10.13.1 ADC hardware signal allocation Name: ZXConfig Data type Value UINT See bit structure Bit structure: Name Value Information Zero cross signals Enabled Disabled 1 - 2...
  • Page 351 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.13.4 Warning threshold for the calculated neutral current Name: INWarnTh0 Current value for monitoring the calculated neutral line current. Data type Value Information UINT 0 to 65000 Resolution 0.001 A 4.3.14.10.13.5 Warning threshold for the measured neutral current.
  • Page 352 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.14 ADC measurement configuration checksum 0 4.3.14.10.14.1 High word for power line constants Name: PLconstH Data type Value UINT 0 to 65,535 Basis value of power line constant = 0x4A817C80 = 1,250,000,000 corresponding to 360 CF pulses per kWh or 0.1 CF pulse per kWs.
  • Page 353 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.15 User calibration of current and voltage values Use the following procedure to properly calculate gain and offset: • Read out the predefined values: See section 4.3.14.10.16 "ADC RMS comparison – read"...
  • Page 354 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.17 ADC RMS comparison checksum 3 4.3.14.10.17.1 Voltage RMS gain phase A/B/C Name: UGainA_W UGainB_W UGainC_W Data type Value Information UINT 0 to 65,535 Voltage RMS gain, phase-based The resulting gain is calculated using the following formula:...
  • Page 355 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.18 User calibration of power values Use the following procedure to properly calculate the power angle correction: 1 Calculate the values 2 Write the value 0xFFFF to register Cs1Update 3 Read register Cs1UpdateFB until 0xFFFF is returned...
  • Page 356 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.18.2 ADC power calibration checksum 1 Name: PhiA_W PhiB_W PhiC_W These registers can be used to correct phase shifts at runtime. This can be necessary if the transformers used distort the phase shift.
  • Page 357 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.19 FlatStream communication 4.3.14.10.19.1 Introduction B&R offers an additional communication method for some modules. "FlatStream" was designed for X2X and POWERLINK networks and allows data transmission to be adapted to individual demands. Although this method is not 100% real-time capable, it still allows data transmission to be handled more efficiently than with standard cyclic polling.
  • Page 358 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.19.2 Message, segment, sequence, MTU The physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With FlatStream communication, all messages are viewed as part of a continuous data stream. Long data streams must be broken down into several fragments that are sent one after the other.
  • Page 359 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.19.3 The FlatStream principle Prerequisites and requirements Before FlatStream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.e. both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence counter on the opposite station. This checks to see if there is new data that should be accepted.
  • Page 360 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.19.4 Registers for FlatStream mode Five registers are available for configuring FlatStream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: The CPU communicates directly with the field device via the "OutputSequence" and "InputSequence"...
  • Page 361 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 FlatStream operation When using FlatStream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the Tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("input" direction), the Rx bytes are used.
  • Page 362 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 MessageEndBit The "MessageEndBit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: In the output direction, this bit must also be set if one individual segment is enough to hold the entire message.
  • Page 363 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Communication status of the module Name: InputSequence The "InputSequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the CPU.
  • Page 364 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Relationship between OutputSequence and InputSequence Outputsequenz Input sequence CPU communication status Module communication status 0 - 2 OutputSequenceCounter 0 - 2 InputSequenceCounter OutputSyncBit Intersecting InputSyncBit 4 - 6 InputSequenceAck Handshakes 4 - 6...
  • Page 365 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Synchronization During synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the SequenceCounter is stored on the station receiving the message.
  • Page 366 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Transmitting and receiving If a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit array in order to meet FlatStream requirements.
  • Page 367 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 First, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limited to the size of the enable MTU.
  • Page 368 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Transmitting data to a module (output) When transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using FlatStream and received by the module.
  • Page 369 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Message larger than the OutputMTU The transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the array elements one after the other. The transfer algorithm remains the same and is repeated starting at the point Cyclic checks.
  • Page 370 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Receiving data from a module (input) When receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via FlatStream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming data stream can be configured with the mode register.
  • Page 371 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 General flow chart Start ► InputSequenceAck = InputSequenceCounter InputSyncBit = 1 ? ► RemainingSegmentSize = 0 ► SegmentFlags = 0 InputSyncAck = 1 ? InputSequenceAck > 0 ? MTU_Offset = 0 InputSyncAck = 1 (InputSequenceCounter –...
  • Page 372 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Details It is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set MessageEndBit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then complete and can be passed on internally for further processing. A new/separate array should be created for the next message.
  • Page 373 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 FlatStream mode Name: FlatstreamMode In the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arrangement. Once enabled, the program code for evaluation must be adapted accordingly.
  • Page 374 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 MultiSegmentMTUs allowed With this option, the InputMTU is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled Rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enabled Rx bytes to be used more efficiently.
  • Page 375 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Using both options It is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 Bus cycle 2 Bus cycle 3 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Message 1...
  • Page 376 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Adjusting the FlatStream If the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier.
  • Page 377 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 First, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the MTU at the end of a message are filled with data from the following message, however.
  • Page 378 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Large segments Segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active MTU. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequences to be completely filled with payload data and not have a control byte.
  • Page 379 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Large segments and MultiSegmentMTU Example Three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an MTU with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segments as well as MultiSegmentMTUs.
  • Page 380 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.19.5 Example of Forward functionality on X2X Link Forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the FlatStream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical areas such as "pipelining" for microprocessors.
  • Page 381 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Configuration The Forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. FlatStream modules have been optimized in such a way that they support this function. In the output direction, the Forward function can be used as soon as the size of the OutputMTU is specified.
  • Page 382 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Transmitting and receiving with Forward The basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the Forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can be transmitted without having to wait for the previous message to be acknowledged.
  • Page 383 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Details/Background 1. Illegal SequenceCounter size (counter offset) Error situation: MTU not enabled If the difference between SequenceCounter and SequenceAck is larger than allowed during transmission, then a transmission error has occurred. In this case, all unacknowledged sequences must be repeated with the old SequenceCounter value.
  • Page 384 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 Errors when using Forward In industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of these technical devices can sometimes cause them to interfere with one another.
  • Page 385 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.20 Force analog energy registers Name: The registers are described under 4.3.14.10.10 "Analog energy registers". Comparison: Force registers Read registers Frc_APenergyT "APenergyT" Frc_APenergyTF Frc_APenergyTH Frc_APenergyA "APenergyA" Frc_APenergyAF Frc_APenergyAH Frc_APenergyB "APenergyB" Frc_APenergyBF...
  • Page 386 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.21 Oversampling buffer 4.3.14.10.21.1 General information A Sample Line contains the present values for currents (4 channels) and voltages (3 channels), as well as a consecutive number and the network time when transferred from the transformer. These values are recorded in an interval of 125 µs * prescaler.
  • Page 387 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.21.8 Sample - Voltage on phase C Name: UactC_Sample1 to UactC_Sample16 Data type Value Information -32,767 to 32,767 Present voltage value on phase C, resolution 0.01 V This value must be converted by the application: See section 4.3.14.10.21.1 "General information"...
  • Page 388 X20 system modules • Analog input modules • X20AP31x1 4.3.14.10.22 Environment variables 4.3.14.10.22.1 Operating time in seconds Name: OnTime The operating time since startup is saved in seconds in this register. Data type Value UDINT 0 to 4,294,967,295 4.3.14.10.22.2 Startup counter...
  • Page 389: Analog Output Modules

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • Brief information 4.4 Analog output modules Analog output modules convert PLC internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numerical values which are to be converted must be in 16-bit 2s complement. The conversion takes place independently of the resolution of the output module used.
  • Page 390: X20Ao2437

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2 X20AO2437 4.4.2.1 General information The X20AO2437 module is equipped with two current outputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. The two channels are electrically isolated from each other. The user can select between the three output ranges 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA and 0 to 24 mA.
  • Page 391 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 Product ID X20AO2437 Max. error at 25°C Gain 4 to 20 mA 0.025% 0 to 20 mA 0.022% 0 to 24 mA 0.020% Offset 4 to 20 mA 0.025% 0 to 20 mA 0.022%...
  • Page 392: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Operating status Green No power to module Single flash UNLINK mode Double flash BOOT mode (during firmware update) Blinking quickly SYNC mode Blinking slowly...
  • Page 393: Connection Example

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.6 Connection example With external Power supply 4-wire Actuator 4-wire Actuator +24 VDC +24 VDC Figure 160: Connection example 4.4.2.7 OSP hardware requirements In order to best use OSP mode, make sure when creating the application that the output module and CPU have separate power supplies.
  • Page 394: Derating

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.9 Derating To ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: Horizontal installation Horizontal installation 60°C / 400 Ω Prohibited Range 50°C / 0 Ω Ambient temperature [°C]...
  • Page 395: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10 Register description 4.4.2.10.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration AnalogMode01 UINT ● AnalogMode02 DACSlewrate01 UINT ● DACSlewrate02...
  • Page 396 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10.4 Analog signal - Configuration The module has two electrically isolated channels. All registers have a dual design. Channels can be configured and operated independently of one another. Specific features • Electrical isolation by channel •...
  • Page 397 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10.4.2 DACSlewrate Name: DACSlewrate01 to DACSlewrate02 These registers limit the rate at which the analog signal is modified. This makes it possible to define a sort of upper limit frequency. The following formula f(Analog) = f(Output rate) * Permitted change / max.
  • Page 398 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10.5 Analog signal - Communication In order to output the required current signal (default: 4 to 20 mA), the module must be provided with the standard- ized output value (default: 0 to 32767).
  • Page 399 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10.6 "OSP" function model In the "OSP" function model (Operator Set Predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This OSP value is output as soon as communication between the module and master is interrupted.
  • Page 400 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2437 4.4.2.10.6.3 Define the OSP analog output value Name: CfgOSPValue01 to CfgOSPValue02 This register contains the analog output value, which is output in "Replace with static value" mode during OSP operation. Data type...
  • Page 401: X20Ao2438

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3 X20AO2438 4.4.3.1 General information The X20AO2438 module is equipped with two current outputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. It supports the HART communication standard for data transfer, parameter configuration and diagnostics.
  • Page 402 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Product ID X20AO2438 Data output rate With Hart 210 ms (default) Analog 1 ms without ramp Max. error at 25°C Gain 4 to 20 mA 0.025% 0 to 20 mA 0.022% 0 to 24 mA 0.020%...
  • Page 403: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Product ID X20AO2438 Mechanical characteristics Note Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately Order 1x X20BM11 bus module separately Spacing 12.5 +0.2 Table 83: X20AO2438 - Technical data Based on the current output value.
  • Page 404: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.5 Pinout Channel 1 + Channel 1 − Channel 2 + Channel 2 − Figure 164: Pinout 4.4.3.6 Connection example With external Power supply 4-wire Actuator 4-wire Actuator +24 VDC +24 VDC Figure 165: Connection example 4.4.3.7 OSP hardware requirements...
  • Page 405: Output Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.8 Output circuit diagram I/O status LED (orange) GND x HART link Processor LED (green) GND x HART error LED (red) Electrical GND x Isolation Receiving Power HART Power supply sections Modem Transfer the file.
  • Page 406: Operation

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.9 Operation 4.4.3.9.1 Derating To ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: Horizontal installation Horizontal installation 60°C / 400 Ω Prohibited Range 50°C / 0 Ω...
  • Page 407 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.9.2 HART communication standard This module supports the HART communication standard for data transfer, parameter configuration and diagnos- tics. The HART standard is used for the current range 4 to 20 mA. Be aware that the load is not permitted to fall below 230 Ω...
  • Page 408: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10 Register description 4.4.3.10.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration AnalogMode01 UINT ● AnalogMode02 DACSlewrate01 UINT ● DACSlewrate02...
  • Page 409 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic 1857 InputSequence USINT ● 1857 + Index*2 RxByteN (Index N = 1 to 15) USINT ● 1889 OutputSequence USINT ● 1889 + Index*2...
  • Page 410 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic FlatStream interface - Configuration 1793 OutputMTU USINT ● 1795 InputMTU USINT ● 1797 FlatstreamMode USINT ● 1799 Forward USINT ● 1802...
  • Page 411 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic 562 + Index*4 PvNodeComStatus01_N (Index N = 01 to UINT ● 1116 + Index*24 PvNodeComStatus02_N (Index N = 01 to...
  • Page 412 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.4 Analog signal - Configuration The X20AO2438 module has two independent electrically isolated channels with integrated HART modems. Both channels can be used to output an analog signal and handle HART communication. Two registers need to be configured for one analog signal.
  • Page 413 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.4.1 AnalogMode Name: AnalogMode01 to AnalogMode02 These registers are used to predefine the operating parameters that the module will be using for the respective channel. Each channel must be activated and configured separately.
  • Page 414 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.4.2 DACSlewrate Name: DACSlewrate01 to DACSlewrate02 These registers limit the rate at which the analog signal is modified. This makes it possible to define a sort of upper limit frequency. The following formula f(Analog) = f(Output rate) * Permitted change / max.
  • Page 415 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.5 Analog signal - Communication In order to output the required current signal (default: 4 bis 20 mA), the module must be assigned the default output value (default: 0 to 32767). In this way, the X20AO2438 can be used as a conventional output module. The integrated HART modem uses the same physical line.
  • Page 416 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.6 HART HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a protocol for communicating with intelligent field devices. It was developed in order to more efficiently use the infrastructure for transferring analog signals. The digital HART notifications are modulated to the analog signal using Frequency Shift Keying (FSK).
  • Page 417 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.6.1 HART - Configuration HART modules are analog modules equipped with a HART modem. For each channel, a separate HART network can be managed by the module, which acts as a primary master. Once configured successfully, the HART infor- mation is stored in the module where it can then be used by the PLC.
  • Page 418 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 HartMode Name: HartMode_1 to HartMode_2 The user can use these registers to configure the communication behavior of each of the HART channels. Gener- ally, the HART nodes are polled individually. This register can still be used to start or stop burst mode when needed.
  • Page 419 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 PvInput Name: PvInput_01 to PvInput_15 These registers return the current value of the process variable that has been read. Information: These registers are of data type REAL, which means that the available bytes on the X2X link are filled more quickly when operated cyclically.
  • Page 420 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 PvNodeComStatus Name: PvNodeComStatus01 to PvNodeComStatus02 PvNodeComStatus01_01 to PvNodeComStatus01_15 PvNodeComStatus02_01 to PvNodeComStatus02_15 These registers return information about whether a value that has been read is valid. According to the HART specification, this type of status register consists of two parts. The high byte stores the "response code" and the low byte the "field device status".
  • Page 421 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 PvCountHartRxError Name: PvCountHartRxError01 to PvCountHartRxError02 These registers are increased if communication errors occur on Layer 1 of the OSI model (e.g. transmission error as per parity bit). Data type Value UDINT...
  • Page 422 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.6.3 Extended configuration The additional configuration registers are specified values when the module is started. In most systems, the user does not need to make any adjustments here. Register values should only be changed if HART network commu- nication is not taking place satisfactorily.
  • Page 423 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.7 FlatStream communication 4.4.3.10.7.1 Introduction B&R offers an additional communication method for some modules. "FlatStream" was designed for X2X and POWERLINK networks and allows data transmission to be adapted to individual demands. Although this method is not 100% real-time capable, it still allows data transmission to be handled more efficiently than with standard cyclic polling.
  • Page 424 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.7.2 Message, segment, sequence, MTU The physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With FlatStream communication, all messages are viewed as part of a continuous data stream. Long data streams must be broken down into several fragments that are sent one after the other.
  • Page 425 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.7.3 The FlatStream principle Requirements Before FlatStream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.e. both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence counter on the opposite station. This checks to see if there is new data that should be accepted.
  • Page 426 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.7.4 Registers for FlatStream mode Five registers are available for configuring FlatStream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: The CPU communicates directly with the field device via the "OutputSequence" and "InputSequence"...
  • Page 427 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 FlatStream operation When using FlatStream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the Tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("input" direction), the Rx bytes are used.
  • Page 428 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 MessageEndBit The "MessageEndBit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: In the output direction, this bit must also be set if one individual segment is enough to hold the entire message.
  • Page 429 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Communication status of the module Name: InputSequence The "InputSequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the CPU.
  • Page 430 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Relationship between OutputSequence and InputSequence Outputsequenz Input sequence CPU communication status Module communication status 0 - 2 OutputSequenceCounter 0 - 2 InputSequenceCounter OutputSyncBit Intersecting InputSyncBit 4 - 6 InputSequenceAck Handshakes 4 - 6...
  • Page 431 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Synchronization During synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the SequenceCounter is stored on the station receiving the message.
  • Page 432 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Transmitting and receiving If a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit array in order to meet FlatStream requirements.
  • Page 433 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 First, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limited to the size of the enable MTU.
  • Page 434 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Transmitting data to a module (output) When transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using FlatStream and received by the module.
  • Page 435 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Message larger than the OutputMTU The transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the array elements one after the other. The transfer algorithm remains the same and is repeated starting at the point Cyclic checks.
  • Page 436 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Receiving data from a module (input) When receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via FlatStream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming data stream can be configured with the mode register.
  • Page 437 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 General flow chart Start ► InputSequenceAck = InputSequenceCounter InputSyncBit = 1 ? ► RemainingSegmentSize = 0 ► SegmentFlags = 0 InputSyncAck = 1 ? InputSequenceAck > 0 ? MTU_Offset = 0 InputSyncAck = 1 (InputSequenceCounter –...
  • Page 438 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Details It is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set MessageEndBit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then complete and can be passed on internally for further processing. A new/separate array should be created for the next message.
  • Page 439 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 FlatStream mode Name: FlatstreamMode In the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arrangement. Once enabled, the program code for evaluation must be adapted accordingly.
  • Page 440 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 MultiSegmentMTUs allowed With this option, the InputMTU is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled Rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enabled Rx bytes to be used more efficiently.
  • Page 441 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Using both options It is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 Bus cycle 2 Bus cycle 3 Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Message 1...
  • Page 442 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Adjusting the FlatStream If the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier.
  • Page 443 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 First, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the MTU at the end of a message are filled with data from the following message, however.
  • Page 444 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Large segments Segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active MTU. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequences to be completely filled with payload data and not have a control byte.
  • Page 445 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Large segments and MultiSegmentMTU Example Three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an MTU with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segments as well as MultiSegmentMTUs.
  • Page 446 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.7.5 Example of Forward functionality on X2X Link Forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the FlatStream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical areas such as "pipelining" for microprocessors.
  • Page 447 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Configuration The Forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. FlatStream modules have been optimized in such a way that they support this function. In the output direction, the Forward function can be used as soon as the size of the OutputMTU is specified.
  • Page 448 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Transmitting and receiving with Forward The basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the Forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can be transmitted without having to wait for the previous message to be acknowledged.
  • Page 449 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Details/Background 1. Illegal SequenceCounter size (counter offset) Error situation: MTU not enabled If the difference between SequenceCounter and SequenceAck is larger than allowed during transmission, then a transmission error has occurred. In this case, all unacknowledged sequences must be repeated with the old SequenceCounter value.
  • Page 450 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 Errors when using Forward In industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of these technical devices can sometimes cause them to interfere with one another.
  • Page 451 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.8 HART with FlatStream When using FlatStream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the X2X master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. FlatStream mode can be used for either point-to-point connections as well as for multidrop systems.
  • Page 452 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.9 "OSP" function model In the "OSP" function model (Operator Set Predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This OSP value is output as soon as communication between the module and master is interrupted.
  • Page 453 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2438 4.4.3.10.9.3 Define the OSP analog output value Name: CfgOSPValue01 to CfgOSPValue02 This register contains the analog output value, which is output in "Replace with static value" mode during OSP operation. Data type...
  • Page 454: X20Ao2622

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 4.4.4 X20AO2622 4.4.4.1 General information The module is equipped with two outputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 455: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 4.4.4.3 Technical data Product ID X20AO2622 Short description I/O module 2 analog outputs ±10 V or 0 to 20 mA / 4 to 20 mA General information B&R ID code 0x1BA2...
  • Page 456: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 Product ID X20AO2622 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Derating Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing...
  • Page 457: Connection Example

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 4.4.4.6 Connection example Voltage Current +24 VDC +24 VDC 4.4.4.7 Output circuit diagram AO + x I Reset Output value converter I/O status AO + x U LED (orange) AO - x U/I...
  • Page 458: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 4.4.4.8 Register description 4.4.4.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard and function model 1 - I/O with fast reaction Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Configuration ConfigOutput01 USINT ●...
  • Page 459 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2622 4.4.4.8.4 Analog outputs Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.4.8.4.1 Output values of the analog outputs...
  • Page 460: X20Ao2632

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5 X20AO2632 4.4.5.1 General information The module is equipped with two outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 461: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 Product ID X20AO2632 Max. error at 25°C Voltage Gain 0.045% Offset 0.025% Current Gain 0.090% Offset 0.045% Output protection Short circuit protection Output format Voltage INT 0x8000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 305.176 µV Current INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 610.352 nA...
  • Page 462: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5.5 Pinout Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. AO + 1 I AO + 2 I...
  • Page 463: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5.8 Register description 4.4.5.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog output - Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● Cfo_Channel01TimeMode UINT ● Cfo_Channel02TimeMode Analog output - Communication AnalogOutput01 ●...
  • Page 464 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5.8.4.1 Setting the channel type Name: ConfigOutput01 This register can be used to set the channel type of the outputs. Each channel is capable of handling either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is determined by the connection terminals used.
  • Page 465 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5.8.5 Analog output - Communication In standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and AnalogOutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the application requires time-based monitoring of the outputs, then a validation timer can be assigned to each channel.
  • Page 466 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632 4.4.5.8.5.4 Enabling/disabling the output channels Name: AnalogOutput01Enable to AnalogOutput02Enable AnalogOutput01EnableReadback to AnalogOutput02EnableReadback The "OutputEnable" byte is only needed for the channels with activated time-based monitoring. The individual bits are used to enable/disable the respective channels. To receive reliable feedback about the current state of the module, the byte was also implemented so that it can be read cyclically.
  • Page 467: X20Ao2632-1

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6 X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.1 General information The module is equipped with two outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 468: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 Product ID X20AO2632-1 Max. error at 25°C Voltage Gain 0.050% Offset 0.015% Current Gain 0.080% Offset 0.050% Output protection Short circuit protection Output format Voltage INT 0x8000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 335.693 µV Current INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 671.386 nA...
  • Page 469: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.5 Pinout Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. AO + 1 I AO + 2 I...
  • Page 470: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.8 Register description 4.4.6.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog output - Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● Cfo_Channel01TimeMode UINT ● Cfo_Channel02TimeMode Analog output - Communication AnalogOutput01 ●...
  • Page 471 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.8.4 Analog output - Configuration Each channel is configured independently. The user can also define an optional time-based monitor. To make this possible, two watchdog timers were implemented, which can be assigned to the outputs.
  • Page 472 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.8.5 Analog output - Communication In standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and AnalogOutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the application requires time-based monitoring of the outputs, then a validation timer can be assigned to each channel.
  • Page 473 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO2632-1 4.4.6.8.5.4 Enabling/disabling the output channels Name: AnalogOutput01Enable to AnalogOutput02Enable AnalogOutput01EnableReadback to AnalogOutput02EnableReadback The "OutputEnable" byte is only needed for the channels with activated time-based monitoring. The individual bits are used to enable/disable the respective channels. To receive reliable feedback about the current state of the module, the byte was also implemented so that it can be read cyclically.
  • Page 474: X20Ao4622

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 4.4.7 X20AO4622 4.4.7.1 General information The module is equipped with four outputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 475: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 Product ID X20AO4622 Max. error at 25°C Voltage Gain 0.080% Offset 0.050% Current Gain 0.090% Offset 0.050% Output protection Short circuit protection Output format Voltage INT 0x8001 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0010 = 4.882 mV Current INT 0x8001 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0010 = 9.766 µA...
  • Page 476: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 4.4.7.5 Pinout Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. AO + 1 I AO + 2 I...
  • Page 477: Module Operation

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 4.4.7.8 Module operation To ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • The following derating listings must be taken into consideration • For mixed operation with one current output, the average of both derating curves should be used •...
  • Page 478 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 Vertical installation From revision J0 Before revision J0 Voltage output Voltage output Prohibited Prohibited range range Ambient temperature [°C] Ambient temperature [°C] Current output Current output Prohibited range Prohibited range Ambient temperature [°C] Ambient temperature [°C]...
  • Page 479: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 4.4.7.9 Register description 4.4.7.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard and function model 1 - I/O with fast reaction Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration...
  • Page 480 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4622 4.4.7.9.4 Analog outputs Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.7.9.4.1 Output values of the analog output...
  • Page 481: X20Ao4632

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8 X20AO4632 4.4.8.1 General information The module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 482: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 Product ID X20AO4632 Max. error at 25°C Voltage Gain 0.040% Offset 0.022% Current Gain 0.090% Offset 0.045% Output protection Short circuit protection Output format Voltage INT 0x8001 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 305.176 µV Current INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 610.352 nA...
  • Page 483: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8.5 Pinout Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. AO + 1 I AO+ 2 I...
  • Page 484: Module Operation

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8.8 Module operation To ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • The following derating listings must be taken into consideration • For mixed operation with one current output, the average of both derating curves should be used •...
  • Page 485 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 Vertical installation From revision J0 Before revision J0 Voltage output Voltage output Prohibited Prohibited range range Ambient temperature [°C] Ambient temperature [°C] Current output Current output Prohibited range Prohibited range Ambient temperature [°C] Ambient temperature [°C]...
  • Page 486: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8.9 Register description 4.4.8.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog signal - Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● Analog signal - Communication Index * 2 AnalogOutput0N (Index N = 1 to 4) ●...
  • Page 487 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8.9.4.2 Value for delayed output Name: AnalogOutputDelayed00 to AnalogOutputDelayed03 These registers contain the values with which the analog outputs are overwritten after the delay configured with OutputDelayConfig0x has expired. Data type...
  • Page 488 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632 4.4.8.9.5 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 489: X20Ao4632-1

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 4.4.9 X20AO4632-1 4.4.9.1 General information The module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 490: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 Product ID X20AO4632-1 Output format Voltage INT 0x8000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 335.693 µV Flow INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 671.386 nA...
  • Page 491: Connection Example

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 AO + 1 I AO + 2 I AO + 1 U AO + 2 U AO - 1 U/I AO - 2 U/I AO + 3 I AO + 4 I...
  • Page 492 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 Horizontal installation Voltage output Horizontal installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C] Figure 192: Derating the load with a voltage output and horizontal mounting Current output Horizontal installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C] Figure 193: Derating the load with a current output and horizontal mounting X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 493 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 Vertical installation Voltage output Vertical installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C] Figure 194: Derating the load with a voltage output and vertical mounting Current output Vertical installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C] Figure 195: Derating the load with a current output and vertical mounting X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 494: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 4.4.9.9 Register description 4.4.9.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Analog output - Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● 590 + Index*4 Cfo_Channel0NTimeMode (Index N = 1 to 4) UINT ●...
  • Page 495 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 4.4.9.9.4 Analog output - Configuration Each channel is configured independently. The user can also define an optional time-based monitor. To make this possible, four watchdog timers were implemented, which can be assigned to the outputs.
  • Page 496 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 4.4.9.9.5 Analog output - Communication In standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and AnalogOutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the application requires time-based monitoring of the outputs, then a validation timer can be assigned to each channel.
  • Page 497 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4632-1 4.4.9.9.5.4 Enabling/disabling the output channels Name: AnalogOutput01Enable to AnalogOutput04Enable AnalogOutput01EnableReadback to AnalogOutput04EnableReadback The "OutputEnable" byte is only needed for the channels with activated time-based monitoring. The individual bits are used to enable/disable the respective channels. To receive reliable feedback about the current state of the module, the byte was also implemented so that it can be read cyclically.
  • Page 498: X20Ao4635

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 4.4.10 X20AO4635 4.4.10.1 General information The module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using different connection terminal points.
  • Page 499: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 Product ID X20AO4635 Output protection Short circuit protection Output format Voltage INT 0x8000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 305.176 µV Current INT 0x0000 - 0x7FFF / 1 LSB = 0x0001 = 610.352 nA...
  • Page 500: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 4.4.10.5 Pinout Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. AO + 1 I AO + 2 I...
  • Page 501: Module Operation

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 4.4.10.8 Module operation To ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • The following derating listings must be taken into consideration • For mixed operation with one current output, the average of both derating curves should be used •...
  • Page 502 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 Vertical installation Voltage output Vertical installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C] Figure 199: Derating the load with a voltage output and vertical mounting Current output Vertical installation Prohibited Range Ambient temperature [°C]...
  • Page 503: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 4.4.10.9 Register description 4.4.10.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● Communication AnalogOutput01 ● AnalogOutput02 ● AnalogOutput03 ● AnalogOutput04 ●...
  • Page 504 X20 system modules • Analog output modules • X20AO4635 4.4.10.9.3 Analog outputs Each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.10.9.3.1 Output values of the analog outputs...
  • Page 505: Bus Controllers

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers 4.5 Bus controllers The bus controllers adhere to the completely modular strategy used for the I/O modules. Made up of a base module, a supply module to supply the voltage for the entire system, and a fieldbus interface, the bus controller is an extremely flexible fieldbus connection.
  • Page 506: Brief Information

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • Brief information 4.5.1 Brief information Product ID Short description on page X20BC0043 X20 bus controller, CANopen interface, order 1x TB2105 terminal block separately. Order bus base, power supply module and terminal block separately.
  • Page 507: X20Bc0043

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 4.5.2 X20BC0043 4.5.2.1 General information CAN (Controller Area Network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. CAN topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for data transfer. CANopen is a higher-layer protocol based on CAN.
  • Page 508: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 Product ID X20BC0043 Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [W] Electrical isolation Fieldbus - X2X Link Fieldbus - I/O Certification cULus cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2 ATEX Zone 2...
  • Page 509: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 Long flash Triple flash 1000 Single flash 1000 Blinking Flashing Green/red Flickering All times in ms Figure 201: Status LED - Blinking patterns 4.5.2.5 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches...
  • Page 510: Terminating Resistor

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 4.5.2.7 Terminating resistor Terminating resistor switch A terminating resistor is already integrated on the bus controller. It can be turned on and off with a switch on the bottom of the housing. An active terminating resistor is indicated by the "TERM" LED.
  • Page 511: Automatic Transfer Rate Detection

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 4.5.2.9 Automatic transfer rate detection After booting, the bus controller goes into "Listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to receive valid objects. If receive errors occur, the controller switches to the next transfer rate in the lookup table.
  • Page 512: Deleting Parameters

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043 4.5.2.11 Deleting parameters Various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • Communication parameters • Vendor-specific parameters • Application parameters (device profile) • Fixed transfer rate Deleting these parameters using switch position 0x90 returns the bus controller to its factory settings.
  • Page 513: X20Bc0043-10

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3 X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.1 General information CAN (Controller Area Network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. CAN topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for data transfer. CANopen is a higher-layer protocol based on CAN.
  • Page 514: Order Data

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.2 Order data Model number Short description Figure Bus controllers X20BC0043-10 X20 bus controller, CANopen interface, configuration support- ed by the B&R FieldbusDESIGNER, order 1x TB2105 terminal block separately. Order bus base, power supply module and ter- minal block separately.
  • Page 515: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 Product ID X20BC0043-10 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Note Order 1x TB2105 terminal block separately Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately...
  • Page 516: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.5 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches Terminal block for bus controller and I/O supply CANopen interface Terminating resistor switch on the bottom of the module Figure 204: Operating and connection elements 4.5.3.6 CAN bus interface...
  • Page 517: Node Number And Transfer Rate

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.8 Node number and transfer rate Node numbers and transfer rates are configured using the two bus controller number switches. The transfer rate can be specified in two ways: • Automatic detection by bus controller (see 4.5.3.9 "Automatic transfer rate detection" on page 517) •...
  • Page 518: Setting The Transfer Rate

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.10 Setting the transfer rate The bus controller will detect the transfer rate automatically by default. Switch positions 0x80 - 0x88 can be used to set a fixed transfer rate, or 0x89 can be used to enable automatic transfer rate detection.
  • Page 519: Save Automatic Configuration

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.11 Save automatic configuration The node number position 0x92 can be used to save automatically generated configurations. This makes it possible to work with a standardized configuration without having to adapt the application to changes associated with service work or different development stages for example.
  • Page 520: Deleting Parameters

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0043-10 4.5.3.12 Deleting parameters Various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • Communication parameters • Vendor-specific parameters • Application parameters (device profile) • Fixed transfer rate Deleting these parameters using switch position 0x90 returns the bus controller to its factory settings.
  • Page 521: X20Bc0053

    I/O modules. Explicit mes- saging, change of state, cyclic, polled and bit strobe are supported as transfer modes. In addition to the standard communication objects, there are also manufacturer-specific objects used to represent the modular X20 System in the best manner possible.
  • Page 522: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0053 Product ID X20BC0053 Power consumption 1.5 W Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [W] Electrical isolation Fieldbus - X2X Link Fieldbus - I/O Certification cULus cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2...
  • Page 523: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0053 Figure Color Status Description Green No power, offline: • Bus sense error: If the "MOD" LED is also off, there is no 24 V DeviceNet voltage. • transfer rate: PS9400's "RUN" active (PREOPERATIONAL or RUN mode), the automatic transfer rate detec- tion is still running or no transfer rate could be detected.
  • Page 524: Terminating Resistor

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0053 4.5.4.7 Terminating resistor Terminating resistor switch A terminating resistor is already integrated on the bus controller. It can be turned on and off with a switch on the bottom of the housing. An active terminating resistor is indicated by the "TERM" LED.
  • Page 525: Automatic Transfer Rate Detection

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0053 4.5.4.9 Automatic transfer rate detection After booting, the bus controller goes into "Listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to receive valid objects. If receive errors occur, the controller switches to the next transfer rate in the lookup table.
  • Page 526: Automatic Configuration Of The I/O Modules

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0053 4.5.4.11 Automatic configuration of the I/O modules The automatic configuration of the connected I/O modules by the bus controller is supported starting with Rev.D0 (firmware ≥V 1.23) of the bus controller. To prevent the configuration data from being accidentally overwritten on the bus controller, the procedure described below must be followed when creating the configuration data.
  • Page 527: X20Bc0063

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0063 4.5.5 X20BC0063 4.5.5.1 General information PROFIBUS DP is based on the physics of the RS485 interface. Data transfer is controlled using a hybrid bus access procedure. Active stations receive communication rights via a token passing procedure and can then access all stations on the network according to the master-slave principle.
  • Page 528: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0063 4.5.5.3 Technical data Product ID X20BC0063 Short description Bus controller PROFIBUS DP V0 slave General information B&R ID code 0x1F1C Status indicators Module status, bus function, data transfer Diagnostics Module status Yes, with status LED and software status...
  • Page 529: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0063 4.5.5.4 LED status indicators Figure Description STATUS and ERROR Status indicator for PROFIBUS DP bus controller. STATUS (green) ERROR (red) Description HARDWARE FAULT / POWER FAIL BUS OFF Blinking WAIT FOR CONFIG...
  • Page 530: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0063 4.5.5.6 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches Terminal block for bus controller and I/O supply PROFIBUS DP interface Figure 207: Operating and connection elements 4.5.5.7 PROFIBUS DP interface...
  • Page 531: Automatic Transfer Rate Detection

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0063 4.5.5.9 Automatic transfer rate detection After booting or after a communication timeout, the bus controller goes into the status "Baud Search". This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus. The bus controller always begins the search for the configured transfer rate with the highest transfer rate. If a complete error-free telegram is not received during monitoring time, then the search is continued using the next lowest transfer rate.
  • Page 532: X20Bc0073

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0073 4.5.6 X20BC0073 4.5.6.1 General information The X20BC0073 bus controller makes it possible to connect X2X Link I/O nodes to CAN I/O. CAN I/O is a transfer protocol based on standard CAN bus fully integrated in the B&R system. From the user's point of view, it doesn't matter if I/O points are operated locally or remotely via CAN I/O.
  • Page 533: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0073 Product ID X20BC0073 Certification cULus cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2 ATEX Zone 2 GOST-R Interfaces Fieldbus CAN I/O slave Design 5-pin male multipoint connector Max. distance 1000 m Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s...
  • Page 534: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0073 4.5.6.5 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches Terminal block for bus controller and I/O supply CAN I/O connection Terminating resistor switch on the bottom of the module Figure 208: Operating and connection elements 4.5.6.6 CAN bus interface...
  • Page 535: Node Number And Transfer Rate

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0073 4.5.6.8 Node number and transfer rate Node numbers and transfer rates are configured using the two bus controller number switches. The switch posi- tions 0x00 to 0x40 and 0x60 enable automatic transfer rate detection (see section 4.5.6.9 "Automatic transfer rate detection"...
  • Page 536 X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0073 4.5.6.10 SG4 The module comes with preinstalled firmware. The firmware is also part of the B&R Automation Runtime operating system for the PLC. If the two versions are different, the Automation Runtime firmware is loaded to the module.
  • Page 537: X20Bc0083

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0083 4.5.7 X20BC0083 4.5.7.1 General information The X20BC0083 bus controller makes it possible to connect X2X Link I/O nodes to POWERLINK. It is also possible to operate the X2X Link cycle synchronously 1:1 or synchronous to POWERLINK using a prescaler.
  • Page 538: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0083 4.5.7.3 Technical data Product ID X20BC0083 Short description Bus controller POWERLINK (V1/V2) controlled node General information B&R ID code 0x1F1E Status indicators Module status, bus function Diagnostics Module status Yes, with status LED and software status...
  • Page 539: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0083 4.5.7.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Green No power supply or mode is NOT_ACTIVE. In this mode, the bus controller waits for about 5 seconds after restarting. No communication with the bus controller is possible.
  • Page 540: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0083 4.5.7.5 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches Terminal block for bus controller and I/O supply POWERLINK connection with 2 x RJ45 connectors for simple wiring Figure 210: Operating and connection elements 4.5.7.6 POWERLINK station number...
  • Page 541: Rj45 Ports

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0083 4.5.7.7 RJ45 ports Information about cabling X20 modules with an Ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com). RJ45 port 1 (IF1) RJ45 port 2 (IF2)
  • Page 542: X20Bc0087

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0087 4.5.8 X20BC0087 4.5.8.1 General information Established in 1979, the Modbus protocol has approved the use of Ethernet with both Modbus/TCP and Mod- bus/UDP. Today, Modbus/TCP is an open Internet draft standard introduced by Schneider Automation to the In- ternet Engineering Task Force (IETF), the organization responsible for Internet standardization.
  • Page 543: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0087 Product ID X20BC0087 Power consumption 2.0 W Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [W] Electrical isolation Fieldbus - X2X Link Fieldbus - I/O Certification cULus cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2...
  • Page 544: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0087 Figure Color Status Description L/A IFx Green Blinking Ethernet activity taking place on the RJ45 port (IF1, IF2) indicated by the respec- tive LED Indicates an established connection (link), but no communication is taking place...
  • Page 545: Modbus/Tcp Network Address Switch

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0087 4.5.8.7 Modbus/TCP network address switch Switch position Description 0x00 This switch position is the factory default setting. In this position, the address switches have no effect on system parame- ters. The bus controller parameters in flash memory are used (IP address and port number). The bus controller is started with factory default values if valid flash data is not present.
  • Page 546: Automatic Ip Assignment By A Dhcp Server

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0087 4.5.8.9 Automatic IP assignment by a DHCP server If a network address switch setting between 0x80 and 0xEF is configured, the bus controller will attempt to request an IP address from the DHCP server. To query this IP address, simply run a "ping" command with the hostname.
  • Page 547: X20Bc0088

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0088 4.5.9 X20BC0088 4.5.9.1 General information EtherNet/IP is a fieldbus based on EtherNet/IP that was developed by Allen-Bradley (Rockwell Automation) and later handed off to the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) as an open standard. In 1998, a working group at ControlNet International developed a procedure for setting the published Common Industrial Protocol to Ethernet.
  • Page 548: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0088 Product ID X20BC0088 Power consumption 2.0 W Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [W] Electrical isolation Fieldbus - X2X Link Fieldbus - I/O Certification cULus cCSAus HazLoc Class 1 Division 2...
  • Page 549: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0088 Figure Color Status Description L/A IFx Green Blinking The respective LED blinks when Ethernet activity is detected on the correspond- ing RJ45 port (IF1, IF2). Connection (link) established, but no communication is taking place.
  • Page 550: Ethernet/Ip Address Switching Positions

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0088 4.5.9.7 EtherNet/IP address switching positions Switch position Description 0x00 The IP address saved in flash memory is used. The adapter is started via DHCP if attribute 3 (configuration control) of the TCP/IP interface object was set to DHCP.
  • Page 551: Automatic Ip Assignment By Dhcp Server

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0088 4.5.9.9 Automatic IP assignment by DHCP server At an address switch position between 0x80 and 0xEF, the bus controller attempts to request an IP address from the DHCP server. To query this IP address, simply run a "ping" command with the host name. The bus controller registers this host name on the DHCP server, which should forward it to a DNS server.
  • Page 552: X20Bc00E3

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 4.5.10 X20BC00E3 4.5.10.1 General information PROFINET (Process Field Network) is an Industrial Ethernet protocol. It uses TCP/IP and is real-time capable. PROFINET IO was developed for real-time (RT) and synchronous communication (IRT = Isochronous Real Time).
  • Page 553: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 4.5.10.3 Technical data Product ID X20BC00E3 Short description Bus controller PROFINET RT slave General information B&R ID code 0xBB7D Status indicators Module status, bus function Diagnostics Module status Yes, with status LED and software status...
  • Page 554: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 4.5.10.4 LED status indicators The following table lists the status LEDs available on the bus controller. Exact blink times are specified in the timing diagram in the next section. Figure Color Status...
  • Page 555: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 4.5.10.5 Operating and connection elements LED status indicator Node number switches Terminal block for bus controller and I/O supply PROFINET RT connection with 2 x RJ45 connectors for simple wiring Figure 214: Operating and connection elements 4.5.10.6 RJ45 ports...
  • Page 556: Node Number Switches

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 4.5.10.7 Node number switches The bus controller has 2 node number switches. The bus controller can be set to different operating modes using certain, pre-defined switch positions. They can also be used to configure various additional parameters (PROFINET device name, DHCP mode, etc.).
  • Page 557 X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00E3 information about the current firmware version. Information concerning module diagnostics is incorporated into a tree structure. Expanding and collapsing the individual module nodes provides an overview of the configured I/O modules. In addition, various package counters are read from the integrated switch. This makes diagnosing errors on the network quick and easy.
  • Page 558: X20Bc00G3

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00G3 4.5.11 X20BC00G3 4.5.11.1 General information EtherCAT is an Ethernet-based fieldbus developed by Beckhoff. The protocol is suitable for hard and soft real-time requirements in automation technology. In addition to a ring structure, which becomes logically necessary because of the summation frame telegram used, the EtherCAT technology also physically supports topologies such as line, tree, star (limited) and combinations of these topologies.
  • Page 559 X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00G3 Product ID X20BC00G3 Diagnostics Module status Yes, with status LED and software status Bus function Yes, with status LED and software status Power consumption 1.68 W Additional power dissipation caused by the actua-...
  • Page 560: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00G3 4.5.11.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description STATUS Green The bus controller is OPERATIONAL. Blinking PRE-OPERATIONAL status Single flash SAFE-OPERATIONAL status Flickering The bus controller has started and is not yet in INIT status or it is in BOOTSTRAP status (e.g.while downloading firmware).
  • Page 561: Rj45 Ports

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC00G3 4.5.11.6 RJ45 ports Information about cabling X20 modules with an Ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com). IN (IF1) OUT (IF2) Interface Pinout Ethernet...
  • Page 562: X20Bc0143-10

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12 X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.1 General information CAN (Controller Area Network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. CAN topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for data transfer. CANopen is a higher-layer protocol based on CAN.
  • Page 563: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.3 Technical data Product ID X20BC0143-10 Short description Bus controller CANopen slave General information B&R ID code 0xAD3E Status indicators Module status, bus function, data transfer Diagnostics Module status Yes, with status LED and software status...
  • Page 564: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Green No power supply Flashing 5 s window for deleting all configuration settings Boot procedure OK, I/O modules OK Double flash Successfully erased flash memory...
  • Page 565: Can Bus Interface

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.6 CAN bus interface The CAN bus interface is a 9-pin DSUB plug. Interface Reserved CAN_L CAN low CAN_GND CAN ground Reserved Reserved Reserved CAN_H CAN high Reserved Reserved Table 171: CAN bus interface - Pinout 4.5.12.7 Node number and transfer rate...
  • Page 566: Automatic Transfer Rate Detection

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.8 Automatic transfer rate detection After booting, the bus controller goes into "Listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to receive valid objects. If receive errors occur, the controller switches to the next transfer rate in the lookup table.
  • Page 567: Save Automatic Configuration

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.10 Save automatic configuration The node number position 0x92 can be used to save automatically generated configurations. This makes it possible to work with a standardized configuration without having to adapt the application to changes associated with service work or different development stages for example.
  • Page 568: Deleting Parameters

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers • X20BC0143-10 4.5.12.11 Deleting parameters Various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • Communication parameters • Vendor-specific parameters • Application parameters (device profile) • Fixed transfer rate Deleting these parameters using switch position 0x90 returns the bus controller to its factory settings.
  • Page 569: Bus Controllers System Modules

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • Brief information 4.6 Bus controllers System modules The X20 system bus controllers are made up of a bus controller fieldbus interface, a bus controller system module and an X20TB12 terminal block.
  • Page 570: X20Bb80

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20BB80 4.6.2 X20BB80 4.6.2.1 General information The following modules are used on the X20BB80 bus module: • X20 base module (BC, HB, etc.) • X20 supply module The left and right end plates are included in the delivery.
  • Page 571: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20BB80 Product ID X20BB80 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Note Left and right X20 end plates included in delivery Spacing 37.5...
  • Page 572: X20Ps9400

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 4.6.3 X20PS9400 4.6.3.1 General information The supply module is used together with an X20 bus controller. It is equipped with a feed for the bus controller, the X2X Link and the internal I/O supply.
  • Page 573: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 Product ID X20PS9400 Bus controller / X2X Link supply output Nominal output power 7.0 W Parallel operation Redundant operation Overload behavior Short circuit / temporary overload protection Input I/O supply...
  • Page 574: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 4.6.3.5 Pinout RS232 TxD RS232 RxD Reserved RS232 GND Reserved Reserved +24 V BC/X2X L. +24 V I/O +24 V BC/X2X L. +24 V I/O Figure 221: Pinout 4.6.3.6 Using the service interface The RS232 service interface is not for use in a machine or system application.
  • Page 575: Derating

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 With a supply and jumper Jumper 10 A slow-blow I/O- Power supply +24 VDC Figure 223: Connection example with a supply and jumper 4.6.3.8 Derating The rated output current for the supply is 7.0 W. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting orientation.
  • Page 576: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 4.6.3.9 Register description 4.6.3.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2 SupplyCurrent USINT ●...
  • Page 577 X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9400 4.6.3.9.6 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 578: X20Ps9402

    X2X Link with the X20PS3300 or X20PS3310 supply module is not possible. Expansion of the X20 system with a bus transmitter is not permitted either. • Supply for the bus controller, X2X Link and internal I/O supply •...
  • Page 579: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9402 Product ID X20PS9402 Reverse polarity protection Bus controller / X2X Link supply output Nominal output power Horizontal installation 7.0 W at 45°C and 5.0 W at 55°C Vertical installation 7.0 W at 40°C and 5.0 W at 50°C...
  • Page 580: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9402 4.6.4.5 Pinout Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved +24 V BC/X2X L. +24 V I/O +24 V BC/X2X L. +24 V I/O Figure 224: X20PS9402 - Pinout 4.6.4.6 Connection examples...
  • Page 581: Derating For Bus Controller / X2X Link Supply

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9402 4.6.4.7 Derating for bus controller / X2X Link supply The rated output current for the bus controller / X2X Link supply is 7.0 W. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting orientation.
  • Page 582: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Bus controllers System modules • X20PS9402 4.6.4.8 Register description 4.6.4.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2 SupplyVoltage USINT ●...
  • Page 583: Bus Modules

    Figure 228: The bus module replaces the rack in the X20 system The bus module is the backbone of the X20 system regarding the bus supply and bus data as well as the I/O supply for the electronics modules. Each bus module is an active bus station, even without an electronics module. There are two variations of the bus module: •...
  • Page 584: X20Bm01

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM01 4.7.2 X20BM01 4.7.2.1 General information The X20BM01 bus module is the base for all X20 supply modules. • Basis for all X20 supply modules • For creating voltage groups • The internal I/O supply is isolated to the left 4.7.2.2 Order data...
  • Page 585: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM01 Product ID X20BM01 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing 12.5 +0.2 Table 184: X20BM01 - Technical data 4.7.2.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 586: X20Bm05

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM05 4.7.3 X20BM05 4.7.3.1 General information The X20BMx5 safety bus modules have node number switches that can be used to set permanent addresses. Placing one of these modules at the beginning of an X20 block ensures a unique address. The addresses of subsequent modules are automatically set in ascending order starting at this address.
  • Page 587: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM05 Product ID X20BM05 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Derating Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing...
  • Page 588: X20Bm11

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM11 4.7.4 X20BM11 4.7.4.1 General information The bus module serves as the base for all 24 VDC X20 I/O modules. The internal I/O supply is interconnected. • Bus module for 24 VDC I/O modules •...
  • Page 589: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM11 Product ID X20BM11 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing 12.5 +0.2 Table 188: X20BM11 - Technical data 4.7.4.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 590: X20Bm12

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM12 4.7.5 X20BM12 4.7.5.1 General information The bus module serves as the base for all 240 VAC X20 I/O modules. The internal I/O supply is interconnected. • Bus module for 240 VAC I/O modules •...
  • Page 591: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM12 Product ID X20BM12 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing 12.5 +0.2 Table 190: X20BM12 - Technical data 4.7.5.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 592: X20Bm15

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM15 4.7.6 X20BM15 4.7.6.1 General information The X20BMx5 safety bus modules have node number switches that can be used to set permanent addresses. Placing one of these modules at the beginning of an X20 block ensures a unique address. The addresses of subsequent modules are automatically set in ascending order starting at this address.
  • Page 593: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM15 Product ID X20BM15 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Derating Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing...
  • Page 594: X20Bm21

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM21 4.7.7 X20BM21 4.7.7.1 General information The X20BM21 bus module serves as a basis for all double-width X20 I/O modules. The internal I/O supply is isolated to the left. This allows the X20BM21 bus module to be used to set up a separate voltage group if the X20BT9100 bus transmitter is used for the supply.
  • Page 595: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM21 Product ID X20BM21 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing +0.2 Table 194: X20BM21 - Technical data 4.7.7.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 596: X20Bm31

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM31 4.7.8 X20BM31 4.7.8.1 General information The X20BM31 bus module serves as a basis for all double-width X20 I/O modules. The internal I/O supply is interconnected. • Bus module for double-width I/O modules •...
  • Page 597: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM31 Product ID X20BM31 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing +0.2 Table 196: X20BM31 - Technical data 4.7.8.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 598: X20Bm32

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM32 4.7.9 X20BM32 4.7.9.1 General information The bus module serves as the base for all double-width 240 VAC X20 I/O modules. The internal I/O supply is interconnected. • Bus module for double-width 240 VAC I/O modules •...
  • Page 599: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Bus modules • X20BM32 Product ID X20BM32 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Spacing +0.2 Table 198: X20BM32 - Technical data 4.7.9.4 Voltage routing...
  • Page 600: Bus Receivers And Bus Transmitters

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • Brief information 4.8 Bus receivers and Bus transmitters The bus receiver X20BR9300is used to connect the X20 system directly to the remote X2X Link backplane. The bus transmitter X20BT9100 is used to connect to the next station.
  • Page 601: X20Br9300

    4.8.2 X20BR9300 4.8.2.1 General information The bus receiver X20BR9300 is used to connect the X20 System to the X2X Link. The module is equipped with a feed for the X2X Link as well as the internal I/O supply. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery.
  • Page 602: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BR9300 4.8.2.3 Technical data Product ID X20BR9300 Short description Bus receiver X2X Link bus receiver with supply for I/O and bus General information B&R ID code 0x1BC1 Status indicators X2X bus function, overload, operating status, module status...
  • Page 603: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BR9300 4.8.2.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash...
  • Page 604: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BR9300 4.8.2.6 Connection examples With two separate supplies X2X\ X2X⊥ 10 A slow-blow X2X Link Power supply Power supply +24 VDC With a supply and jumper X2X\ X2X⊥ Jumper 10 A slow-blow...
  • Page 605: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BR9300 4.8.2.8 Register description 4.8.2.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2...
  • Page 606 X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BR9300 4.8.2.8.6 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 607: X20Bt9100

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 4.8.3 X20BT9100 4.8.3.1 General information The bus transmitter provides for the seamless expansion of the X20 System. The stations can be up to 100 m away from each other. • X2X Link bus transmitter •...
  • Page 608: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 4.8.3.3 Technical data Product ID X20BT9100 Short description Bus transmitter X2X Link bus transmitter with supply for I/O General information B&R ID code 0x1BC2 Status indicators X2X bus function, operating status, module status...
  • Page 609: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 4.8.3.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode No power to module or everything OK...
  • Page 610: Supply Via Bus Transmitter

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 With feed for internal I/O supply See also 4.8.3.7 "Supply via bus transmitter". X2X\ X2X⊥ 10 A slow-blow Power supply +24 VDC Figure 240: Connection example - With feed for internal I/O supply 4.8.3.7 Supply via bus transmitter...
  • Page 611: Connection To Next X2X Link I/O Node

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 4.8.3.8 Connection to next X2X Link I/O node The bus transmitter establishes the connection to the next X2X Link based I/O node. It is important to be sure that only the data lines are connected on.
  • Page 612: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9100 4.8.3.9 Register description 4.8.3.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2...
  • Page 613: X20Bt9400

    4.8.4.1 General information To connect an X20 system to an X67 system, a bus transmitter is simple added to the end of the X20 block, so that the X2X Link cable can be connected. The bus transmitter also provides the X2X supply voltage for the X67 system.
  • Page 614: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9400 4.8.4.3 Technical data Product ID X20BT9400 Short description Bus transmitter X2X Link bus transmitter with supply for I/O and integrated supply for the X67 system General information B&R ID code...
  • Page 615: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9400 4.8.4.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash...
  • Page 616: Supply Via Bus Transmitter

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9400 With a supply and jumper X2X\ ⊥ X2X+ Jumper 10 A slow-blow Power supply +24 VDC Figure 244: Connection example with a supply and jumper No feed for internal I/O supply X2X\ ⊥...
  • Page 617: Connection Between X20 And X67 System

    4.8.4.8 Connection between X20 and X67 system The bus transmitter establishes the link between the X20 system and the X67 system. In addition to the data lines, the X2X Link supply is also fed through. The module can supply up to 8 X67 modules. An additional X67 supply module is only needed if operating more than 8 X67 modules.
  • Page 618: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9400 4.8.4.9 Register description 4.8.4.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2...
  • Page 619 X20 system modules • Bus receivers and Bus transmitters • X20BT9400 4.8.4.9.6 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 620: Compact Cpus

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs 4.9 Compact CPUs The modular structure of the Compact CPUs allows the user to assemble a CPU that meets their unique power supply and interface requirements. Compact CPU base X20 BB 2x Compact CPU...
  • Page 621: Brief Information

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • Brief information 4.9.1 Brief information Product ID Short description on page X20CP0201 X20 CPU, compact CPU µP 16, 100 kB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, support of RS232 and CAN according to compact CPU base, order bus base, power supply module and terminal block separately X20CP0291 X20 CPU, compact CPU µP 16, 100 kB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, support of RS232 and CAN according to...
  • Page 622: X20Cp0201, X20Cp0291, X20Cp0292

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2 X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2.1 General information Compact CPUs are ideal for situations where cycle times in the millisecond range are sufficient and a cost-benefit analysis plays a decisive role. A range of models with CAN and Ethernet can adapt optimally to all demands. The result: extremely sleek automation solutions.
  • Page 623: Order Data

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2.2 Order data CP0201 CP0291, CP0292 Model number Short description Compact CPUs X20CP0201 X20 CPU, compact CPU µP 16, 100 kB SRAM, 1 MB FlashPROM, support of RS232 and CAN...
  • Page 624: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2.3 Technical data Product ID X20CP0201 X20CP0291 X20CP0292 Short description Interfaces 1x Ethernet onboard 1x onboard Ethernet System module General information B&R ID code 0x22A2 0x22A4 0x22A6 Status indicators CPU function...
  • Page 625: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 Product ID X20CP0201 X20CP0291 X20CP0292 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Note Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately...
  • Page 626: Node Number Switches

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 X20CP0291 and X20CP0292 LED status indicators Node number switch IF1 - RS232 IF3 - CAN bus (with BB27) IF2 - Ethernet Terminal block for CPU and I/O supply RS232 connection...
  • Page 627: Ethernet Interface (If2)

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2.7 Ethernet interface (IF2) Figure 251: X20 compact CPUs - Ethernet interface for X20CP0291 and X20CP0292 The X20CP0291 and X20CP0292 are equipped with an Ethernet interface. The connection is made using a 100 BASE-T twisted pair RJ45 socket.
  • Page 628: Programming The System Flash Memory

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs • X20CP0201, X20CP0291, X20CP0292 4.9.2.8 Programming the system flash memory General information CPUs are delivered with a runtime system. When delivered, the node number switch is set to switch position 0x00 (bootstrap loader mode).
  • Page 629: Compact Cpus System Modules

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • Brief information 4.10 Compact CPUs System modules The X20 system Compact CPUs consist of the Compact CPU, Compact CPU system modules and the X20TB12 terminal block. The Compact CPU system modules also include the X20BB22 and X20BB27 base modules as well as the X20PS9500 supply module for supplying the entire system with voltage.
  • Page 630: X20Bb22

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20BB22 4.10.2 X20BB22 4.10.2.1 General information The X20BB22 bus module is the base for all X20 Compact CPUs. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • Base for all X20 Compact CPUs •...
  • Page 631: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20BB22 Product ID X20BB22 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Note Left and right X20 end plates included in delivery Spacing 37.5...
  • Page 632: X20Bb27

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20BB27 4.10.3 X20BB27 4.10.3.1 General information The X20BB27 bus module is the base for all X20 Compact CPUs. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • Base for all X20 Compact CPUs •...
  • Page 633: Voltage Routing

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20BB27 Product ID X20BB27 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing...
  • Page 634: X20Ps9500

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9500 4.10.4 X20PS9500 4.10.4.1 General information The X20PS9500 supply module is used together with an X20 compact or fieldbus CPU. It has a feed for the compact or fieldbus CPU, the X2X Link and the internal I/O supply.
  • Page 635: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9500 4.10.4.3 Technical data Product ID X20PS9500 Brief description Power supply module 24 VDC supply module for compact or fieldbus CPU, X2X Link supply and I/O Interfaces 1x RS232, 1x CAN bus General information B&R ID code...
  • Page 636: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9500 Product ID X20PS9500 Relative humidity Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing Mechanical characteristics Note Order 1x X20TB12 terminal block separately Order 1x X20BB22 or X20BB27 compact CPU base separately...
  • Page 637: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9500 4.10.4.6 Connection examples With 2 separate supplies 10 A slow-blow CPU / X2X Link supply supply +24 VDC Figure 255: Connection example with 2 separate supplies With a supply and jumper...
  • Page 638: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9500 4.10.4.8 Register description 4.10.4.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Non-cyclic Cyclic Non-cyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2 SupplyCurrent USINT ●...
  • Page 639: X20Ps9502

    An expansion or redundancy of the X2X Link with the X20PS3300 or X20PS3310 supply module is not possible. Expansion of the X20 System with a bus transmitter is not permitted either. • Supply for the Compact or Fieldbus CPU, X2X Link, and internal I/O supply •...
  • Page 640 X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9502 Product ID X20PS9502 Power consumption 1.44 W Internal I/O 0.6 W Additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [W] Electrical isolation CPU/X2X Link feed - CPU/X2X Link supply...
  • Page 641: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9502 4.10.5.4 LED status indicators Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode No power to module or everything OK Double flash LED indicates one of the following states: •...
  • Page 642: Connection Examples

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9502 4.10.5.6 Connection examples With 2 separate supplies 10 A slow-blow CPU / X2X Link supply supply +24 VDC Figure 258: Connection example with 2 separate supplies With a supply and jumper...
  • Page 643: Derating For Cpu / X2X Link Supply

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9502 4.10.5.7 Derating for CPU / X2X Link supply The rated output power for the CPU / X2X Link supply is 7.0W. Derating may be necessary depending on the mounting orientation.
  • Page 644: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Compact CPUs System modules • X20PS9502 4.10.5.8 Register description 4.10.5.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Module status USINT ● StatusInput01 Bit 0 StatusInput02 Bit 2 SupplyVoltage USINT ●...
  • Page 645: Counter Modules

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • Brief information 4.11 Counter modules Counter modules are used for position detection. Each signal on a counter module is assigned to a status LED. 4.11.1 Brief information Product ID Short description on page...
  • Page 646: X20Cm1941

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2 X20CM1941 4.11.2.1 General information The module is equipped with a resolver input and a configurable ABR output. • Resolver input (differential), with angular position and cyclic counter • 14-bit resolution for the angular position •...
  • Page 647 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 Product ID X20CM1941 ABR output Encoder signal RS422 Type ABR differential ABR output (starting with firmware version 5) 8-bit to 12-bit 3500 rpm ABR output (up to firmware version 4) 8-bit Max. 2343 rpm 9-bit Max.
  • Page 648: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 649: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2.7 Input circuit diagram /COS Band-pass 10 kHz /SIN 4.11.2.8 Output circuit diagram FPGA /Ref Band-pass 10 kHz X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 650: Abr Encoder

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2.9 ABR encoder Up to firmware version 4 The module measures the resolver's current angular position every 100 µs. The value for A, B or R is generated immediately from the highest value bits (depending on configuration bit 8 to 10).
  • Page 651: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2.10 Register description 4.11.2.10.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration ConfigOutput01 UINT ● ConfigOutput02 USINT ● Communication Position DINT ● StatusInput USINT ●...
  • Page 652 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20CM1941 4.11.2.10.5 Current encoder position Name: Position The current angle position of the resolver is shown in this register. The value consists of: • The two upper bytes, which correspond to the number of rotations counted from -32768 (0x8000xxxx) to +32767 (0x7FFFxxxx) •...
  • Page 653: X20Dc1176

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3 X20DC1176 4.11.3.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 5 V encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (A, B, R, A\, B\, R\).
  • Page 654 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 Product ID X20DC1176 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 5 V, symmetrical Counter size 16/32-bit Input frequency Max. 600 kHz...
  • Page 655: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 656: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O status LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 657: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8 Register description 4.11.3.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication SDCLifeCount SINT ● 6342 Encoder01 ● 6340 DINT 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ●...
  • Page 658 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication 6342 Encoder01 ● 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ● 6358 Encoder01Latch ● 6153 Encoder commands USINT ●...
  • Page 659 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.3.8.3.1 Enabling error monitoring for the signal lines Name: CfO_BWCNTEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register requires individually enabling error monitoring for each of the signal channels. "Open line", "short circuit"...
  • Page 660 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.3.4 Signal channels for triggering latch procedure Name: CfO_LatchComparator This register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • This mainly configures which channels are linked to generate the latch event. All three signals from the encoder and digital input 1 can be used for the "AND"...
  • Page 661 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh05"...
  • Page 662 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.3.8.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 663 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.4.5 Counter value at the time of the last latch Name: Encoder01Latch The counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus controller function model.
  • Page 664 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.4.8 Input status of signal lines Name: Encoder01_A Encoder01_B Encoder01_R DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 This register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs. Data type...
  • Page 665 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 Acknowledging error status of signal lines Name: BW_QuitChannel_A BW_QuitChannel_B BW_QuitChannel_R This register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After acknowledging the errors, the bits must also be reset or else any repetition of the error would be undetected.
  • Page 666 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 667 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 668 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1176 4.11.3.8.4.10 Status of encoder supplies Name: PowerSupply01 to PowerSupply02 This register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 669: X20Dc1178

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4 X20DC1178 4.11.4.1 General information This module is equipped with one input for SSI absolute encoders with 5 V encoder signal. The data signal is monitored (Data, Data\). • 1 SSI absolute encoder 5 V •...
  • Page 670 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 Product ID X20DC1178 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V SSI absolute encoder Counter size Encoder-dependent up to 32-bit Max. transfer rate 1 Mbit/s...
  • Page 671: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 672: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.7 Input circuit diagram Counter input Data Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O status Data LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status...
  • Page 673: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9 Register description 4.11.4.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration CfO_SystemCyclePrescaler UINT ● 2049 CfO_CycleSelect USINT ● 2951 CfO_PhysicalMode USINT ● 2053...
  • Page 674 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration CfO_SystemCyclePrescaler UINT ● 2049 CfO_CycleSelect USINT ● 2951 CfO_PhysicalMode USINT ● 2053 CfO_DataBits USINT ●...
  • Page 675 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.4.9.3.1 Setting the SSI sampling cycle time The following two registers define the cycle time for SSI sampling.
  • Page 676 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.3.2 Setting operating parameters Name: CfO_PhysicalMode This register defines the operating parameters for the SSI encoder to correctly evaluate the data from the encoder. • Parity: Data with or without parity; an error is reported if there is an even or uneven parity mismatch.
  • Page 677 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.3.5 Timing for automatic error acknowledgment Name: CfO_BWQuitTime_0 This register can be used to enable an additional automatic acknowledgment of the error status through timing. If a valid time is set, then the acknowledgment can still be made manually, the only difference is that automatic acknowledgment will take place on the module after the defined amount of time has passed.
  • Page 678 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 679 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 680 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.3.6 Enable/disable error monitoring for the signal channels Name: CfO_BWSSIEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register allows error monitoring for each of the signal channels to be enabled individually. "Open line", "short circuit" and "voltage level too low" are reported as error states. Any errors that occur are reported in the error status registers.
  • Page 681 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.4.9.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 682 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.4.5 Net time of the last counter value change Name: Encoder01TimeChanged For slow X2X Link cycles, the net time of the last counter value change can be used to more accurately determine the speed.
  • Page 683 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1178 4.11.4.9.4.8 Status of signal lines Name: BW_Channel_D This register displays the error state of the signal line from the encoder. The error state is latched when it occurs and is maintained until acknowledged. The counter and time registers are not updated if there are pending or unacknowledged errors.
  • Page 684: X20Dc1196

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5 X20DC1196 4.11.5.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 5 V encoder signal. • 1 ABR incremental encoder 5 V • 2 additional inputs e.g. for home enable switch •...
  • Page 685 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 Product ID X20DC1196 Input resistance 7.19 kΩ Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 5 V, symmetrical Counter size...
  • Page 686: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 687: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs RS485 driver Input status Recipient I/O status LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 688: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8 Register description 4.11.5.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard and Function model 1 - Standard with 32-bit encoder counter value The difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the data type for some registers.
  • Page 689 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8.3 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.5.8.3.1 Reference pulse The following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on the edge of the reference pulse.
  • Page 690 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8.3.3 Homing with reference enable input Regardless of the referencing mode, it is possible using this register to prevent the home position from being applied when the corresponding reference input voltage level occurs (see 4.11.5.8.4.2 "Input state of digital inputs 1 to 2": bit 4).
  • Page 691 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8.4 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.5.8.4.1 Counter state of the encoder Name: Encoder01 The encoder values are represented as 16-bit or 32-bit counter values in this register. Data type Value -32,768 to 32,767...
  • Page 692 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8.4.4 Status of the homing procedure Name: StatusInput01 This register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Name...
  • Page 693 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1196 4.11.5.8.5 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 694: X20Dc1198

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6 X20DC1198 4.11.6.1 General information This module is equipped with one input for SSI absolute encoders with 5 V encoder signal. • 1 SSI absolute encoder 5 V • 2 additional inputs •...
  • Page 695 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 Product ID X20DC1198 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V SSI absolute encoder Encoder inputs 5 V, symmetrical Counter size 32-bit Max. transfer rate...
  • Page 696: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 697: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6.7 Input circuit diagram Counter input Data RS485 driver Input status Recipient I/O status Data LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status...
  • Page 698: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6.9 Register description 4.11.6.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration 7176 ConfigOutput14 UINT ● 7172 ConfigAdvanced UDINT ● Communication 7184 Encoder01 UDINT ●...
  • Page 699 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6.9.3 SSI encoder configuration register 4.11.6.9.3.1 Standard configuration Name: ConfigOutput14 This configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command.
  • Page 700 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1198 4.11.6.9.4 SSI encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.6.9.4.1 SSI position values Name: Encoder01 The SSI encoder value is displayed as a 32-bit position value. The SSI position value is generated synchronously with the X2X cycle.
  • Page 701: X20Dc11A6

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7 X20DC11A6 4.11.7.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 5 V encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (A, B, R, A\, B\, R\).
  • Page 702 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 Product ID X20DC11A6 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 5 V, symmetrical Counter size 16/32-bit Input frequency Max. 5 MHz...
  • Page 703: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 704: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O status LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 705: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8 Register description 4.11.7.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication SDCLifeCount SINT ● 6342 Encoder01 ● 6340 DINT 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ●...
  • Page 706 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication 6342 Encoder01 ● 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ● 6358 Encoder01Latch ● 6153 Encoder commands USINT ●...
  • Page 707 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.7.8.3.1 Enabling error monitoring for the signal lines Name: CfO_BWCNTEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register requires individually enabling error monitoring for each of the signal channels. "Open line", "short circuit"...
  • Page 708 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.3.4 Signal channels for triggering latch procedure Name: CfO_LatchComparator This register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • This mainly configures which channels are linked to generate the latch event. All three signals from the encoder and digital input 1 can be used for the "AND"...
  • Page 709 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh05"...
  • Page 710 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.7.8.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 711 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.4.5 Counter value at the time of the last latch Name: Encoder01Latch The counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus controller function model.
  • Page 712 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.4.8 Input status of signal lines Name: Encoder01_A Encoder01_B Encoder01_R DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 This register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs. Data type...
  • Page 713 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 Acknowledging error status of signal lines Name: BW_QuitChannel_A BW_QuitChannel_B BW_QuitChannel_R This register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After acknowledging the errors, the bits must also be reset or else any repetition of the error would be undetected.
  • Page 714 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 715 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 716 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC11A6 4.11.7.8.4.10 Status of encoder supplies Name: PowerSupply01 to PowerSupply02 This register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 717: X20Dc1376

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8 X20DC1376 4.11.8.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 24 V encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (A, B, R). • 1 ABR incremental encoder 24 V, asymmetric •...
  • Page 718 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 Product ID X20DC1376 Input resistance 7.03 kΩ Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, asymmetrical (single-ended) Counter size...
  • Page 719: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 720: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O status LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 721: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8 Register description 4.11.8.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication SDCLifeCount SINT ● 6342 Encoder01 ● 6340 DINT 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ●...
  • Page 722 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication 6342 Encoder01 ● 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ● 6358 Encoder01Latch ● 6153 Encoder commands USINT ●...
  • Page 723 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.8.8.3.1 Enabling error monitoring for the signal lines Name: CfO_BWCNTEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register requires individually enabling error monitoring for each of the signal channels. "Open line", "short circuit"...
  • Page 724 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.3.4 Signal channels for triggering latch procedure Name: CfO_LatchComparator This register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • This mainly configures which channels are linked to generate the latch event. All three signals from the encoder and digital input 1 can be used for the "AND"...
  • Page 725 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh05"...
  • Page 726 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.8.8.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 727 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.4.6 Counter value of latch event Name: Encoder01LatchCount The latch events are counted and stored in a cyclic 8-bit counter. This counter is incremented with each latch event, thereby indicating a new occurrence. The new latched counter value is stored in the respective latch register.
  • Page 728 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.4.9 Error status of signal lines The error states are latched when they occur and are maintained until acknowledged. The counter and time reg- isters are not updated if there are pending or unacknowledged errors.
  • Page 729 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 730 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 731 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1376 4.11.8.8.4.10 Status of encoder supply Name: PowerSupply01 This register shows the status of the integrated encoder supply. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 732: X20Dc137A

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9 X20DC137A 4.11.9.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 24 V differential signals. The encoder inputs are monitored (A, B, R, A\, B\, R\).
  • Page 733 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A Product ID X20DC137A Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, differential Counter size 16/32-bit Input frequency Max. 300 kHz...
  • Page 734: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 735: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O Status ABR\ LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 736: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8 Register description 4.11.9.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication SDCLifeCount SINT ● 6342 Encoder01 ● 6340 DINT 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ●...
  • Page 737 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication 6342 Encoder01 ● 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ● 6358 Encoder01Latch ● 6153 Encoder commands USINT ●...
  • Page 738 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.9.8.3.1 Enabling error monitoring for the signal lines Name: CfO_BWCNTEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register requires individually enabling error monitoring for each of the signal channels. "Open line", "short circuit"...
  • Page 739 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.3.4 Signal channels for triggering latch procedure Name: CfO_LatchComparator This register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • This mainly configures which channels are linked to generate the latch event. All three signals from the encoder and digital input 1 can be used for the "AND"...
  • Page 740 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh05"...
  • Page 741 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.9.8.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 742 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.4.6 Counter value of latch event Name: Encoder01LatchCount The latch events are counted and stored in a cyclic 8-bit counter. This counter is incremented with each latch event, thereby indicating a new occurrence. The new latched counter value is stored in the respective latch register.
  • Page 743 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.4.9 Error status of signal lines The error states are latched when they occur and are maintained until acknowledged. The counter and time reg- isters are not updated if there are pending or unacknowledged errors.
  • Page 744 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 745 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 746 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC137A 4.11.9.8.4.10 Status of encoder supply Name: PowerSupply01 This register shows the status of the integrated encoder supply. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 747: X20Dc1396

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10 X20DC1396 4.11.10.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 24 V encoder signal. • 1 ABR incremental encoder 24 V • 1 additional input e.g. for home enable switch •...
  • Page 748 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 Product ID X20DC1396 Isolation voltage between home enable switch and 500 V Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, asymmetrical Counter size 16/32-bit Input frequency Max.
  • Page 749: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 750: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status I/O status 24 V LED (green) Encoder 24 V Standard input Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 751: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8 Register description 4.11.10.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard and Function model 1 - Standard with 32-bit encoder counter value The difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the data type for some registers.
  • Page 752 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8.3 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.10.8.3.1 Reference pulse The following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on the edge of the reference pulse.
  • Page 753 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8.3.3 Homing with reference enable input Regardless of the referencing mode, it is possible using this register to prevent the home position from being applied when the corresponding reference input voltage level occurs (see 4.11.10.8.4.2 "Input state of the digital input": bit 3).
  • Page 754 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8.4 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.10.8.4.1 Counter state of the encoder Name: Encoder01 The encoder values are represented as 16-bit or 32-bit counter values in this register. Data type Value -32,768 to 32,767...
  • Page 755 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8.4.4 Status of the homing procedure Name: StatusInput01 This register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Name...
  • Page 756 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1396 4.11.10.8.5 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 757: X20Dc1398

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11 X20DC1398 4.11.11.1 General information This module is equipped with one input for SSI absolute encoders with 24 V encoder signal. • 1 SSI absolute encoder 24 V • 1 additional input •...
  • Page 758 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 Product ID X20DC1398 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V SSI absolute encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, asymmetrical Counter size 32-bit Max. transfer rate...
  • Page 759: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 760: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11.7 Input circuit diagram Counter input Data Input status I/O status 24 V LED (green) Encoder 24 V Standard input Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) 4.11.11.8 Output circuit diagram...
  • Page 761: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11.9 Register description 4.11.11.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration 7176 ConfigOutput14 UINT ● 7172 ConfigAdvanced UDINT ● Communication 7184 Encoder01 UDINT ●...
  • Page 762 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11.9.3 SSI encoder configuration register 4.11.11.9.3.1 Standard configuration Name: ConfigOutput14 This configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command.
  • Page 763 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1398 4.11.11.9.4 SSI encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.11.9.4.1 SSI position values Name: Encoder01 The SSI encoder value is displayed as a 32-bit position value. The SSI position value is generated synchronously with the X2X cycle.
  • Page 764: X20Dc1976

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12 X20DC1976 4.11.12.1 General information The module is equipped with 1 input for an ABR incremental encoder with 5 V encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (A, B, R). • 1 ABR incremental encoder 5 V, asymmetric •...
  • Page 765 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 Product ID X20DC1976 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 5 V, asymmetrical (single-ended) Counter size 16/32-bit Input frequency Max.
  • Page 766: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 767: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Input status Recipient with monitoring I/O status LED (green) 24 V Encoder 24 V 24 V Encoder 5 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 768: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8 Register description 4.11.12.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication SDCLifeCount SINT ● 6342 Encoder01 ● 6340 DINT 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ●...
  • Page 769 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Encoder - Communication 6342 Encoder01 ● 6310 Encoder01TimeValid ● 6358 Encoder01Latch ● 6153 Encoder commands USINT ●...
  • Page 770 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.3 Encoder - Configuration The following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.12.8.3.1 Enabling error monitoring for the signal lines Name: CfO_BWCNTEnableMaskChannel7_0 This register requires individually enabling error monitoring for each of the signal channels. "Open line", "short circuit"...
  • Page 771 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.3.4 Signal channels for triggering latch procedure Name: CfO_LatchComparator This register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • This mainly configures which channels are linked to generate the latch event. All three signals from the encoder and digital input 1 can be used for the "AND"...
  • Page 772 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh03 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04" Name: CfO_PhyIOConfigCh04 Data type Value Information USINT Only default in the bus controller module Constant register "CfO_PhyIOConfigCh05"...
  • Page 773 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.4 Encoder - Communication 4.11.12.8.4.1 Counter for verifying the data frame Name: SDCLifeCount The 8-bit counter register is needed for the SDC software package. It is incremented with the system clock to allow the SDC to check the validity of the data frame.
  • Page 774 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.4.5 Counter value at the time of the last latch Name: Encoder01Latch The counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus controller function model.
  • Page 775 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.4.8 Input status of signal lines Name: Encoder01_A Encoder01_B Encoder01_R DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 This register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs. Data type...
  • Page 776 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 Acknowledging error status of signal lines Name: BW_QuitChannel_A BW_QuitChannel_B BW_QuitChannel_R This register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After acknowledging the errors, the bits must also be reset or else any repetition of the error would be undetected.
  • Page 777 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 Manual acknowledgment of latched error states The latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status remains active. After successfully acknowledging the errors (latched error status = 0), the acknowledge bits must still be reset by the user or else a re-occurrence of an error could be overlooked by the user.
  • Page 778 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 Automatic acknowledgment of latched error states In addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time is set long enough for the higher-level system to reliably detect the status messages and for the validity of the counter value to be determined using its age.
  • Page 779 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC1976 4.11.12.8.4.10 Status of encoder supplies Name: PowerSupply01 to PowerSupply02 This register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 780: X20Dc2190

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13 X20DC2190 4.11.13.1 General information This module can be used to determine paths and to calculate speeds at the same time. The ultrasonic transducer rods are connected directly to the RS422 interface. Communication to the transducer rod takes place using start/ stop signals.
  • Page 781: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 Product ID X20DC2190 Encoder supply Voltage 24 VDC, module-internal, max. 150 mA Monitoring Configurable overvoltage/undervoltage monitoring (±10%, ±15%, ±20%, ±25%) Short circuit protection Rev. D0 and higher Input and output level RS422 differential level Multi-magnet measurement Yes, in combination per rod, max.
  • Page 782: Pinout

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.5 Pinout Channel 1 Channel 2 Start + Start + Start - Start - Stop + Stop + Stop - Stop - +24 VDC +24 VDC Figure 285: Pinout The ultrasonic transducers should be connected using a shielded cable. The shield of the encoder cable is con- nected to the ground via the shield connection on the X20 bus module.
  • Page 783: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7 Register description 4.11.13.7.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous register Position01 DINT ● Position02 DINT ● Position03 DINT ● Position04 DINT ●...
  • Page 784 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic StatusInput14 UDINT ● StatusInput15 UDINT ● StatusInput16 UDINT ● StatusInput17 UDINT ● StatusInput18 UDINT ● StatusInput19 UDINT ● StatusInput20 UDINT ● StatusInput21 UDINT ●...
  • Page 785 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 Register Offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 2000 ConfigOutput03Read UDINT ● 2004 ConfigOutput04Read UDINT ● 2008 ConfigOutput07Read DINT ● 2012 ConfigOutput08Read DINT ● 2024 ConfigOutput09Read DINT ● 2028...
  • Page 786 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.3 Commissioning a transducer rod Two registers need to be configured to initialize an ultrasonic transducer rod and receive valid measurements. The first step is to enter the length of the rod (see section 4.11.13.7.12 "Rod length 1 and 2" on page 789). The wave propagation speed for the rod must then be defined (see section 4.11.13.7.8 "Ultrasonic speed specification"...
  • Page 787 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.7 Status information about the transducer rods Name: StatusInput01 This register displays the status information for the transducer rods. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Name Value Information Supply voltage too low...
  • Page 788 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.9 Applying new magnet offsets Name: StatusOutput01 This register makes it easier to more quickly determine new offsets (= zero positions) for the individual magnets. This approach is an alternative or additional method to determining an offset via configuration registers (see section 4.11.13.7.13 "Offset position on the transducer"...
  • Page 789 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.11 Channel configuration Name: ConfigOutput02 This register can be used to configure the individual channels. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Description Value Information 0 - 2 Transducer Rod 1...
  • Page 790 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.13 Offset position on the transducer Name: ConfigOutput07 to ConfigOutput08 ConfigOutput15 to ConfigOutput16 These registers are used to assign the respective magnet an offset position (= zero position) on the transducer. The max. and min. magnet paths refer to these specified offsets (see 4.11.13.7.14 "Plausibility check configuration"...
  • Page 791 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.14.3 Max. plausible magnet speed Name: ConfigOutput13 to ConfigOutput14 ConfigOutput21 to ConfigOutput22 These registers are used to assign the max. plausible magnet speed. • Max. speed - magnet 1: ConfigOutput13 • Max. speed - magnet 2: ConfigOutput14 •...
  • Page 792 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2190 4.11.13.7.17.1 Parameter overview The following parameters are stored in the status registers: Register Description Supported by the protocol DP/IP StatusInput09 Rod length 1 [mm] ● ● StatusInput10 Rod length 2 [mm] ●...
  • Page 793: X20Dc2395

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14 X20DC2395 4.11.14.1 General information This module is a multifunctional counter module. It can be connected to one SSI encoder, one ABR encoder, two AB encoders or four event counters. Two outputs are available for pulse width modulation. The functions can also be mixed.
  • Page 794: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.3 Technical data Product ID X20DC2395 Short description I/O module 1 SSI absolute encoder, 24 V, 1 ABR incremental encoder, 24 V, 2 AB incremental encoders, 24 V, 4x event counters or 2x pulse width modulation, time measurement, relative timestamp...
  • Page 795 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Product ID X20DC2395 Measurement type Continuous or triggered Digital outputs Design Push / Pull / Push-Pull Quantity Nominal voltage 24 VDC Switching voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20% Nominal output current 0.1 A Total nominal current 0.2 A...
  • Page 796: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 797: Function Overview

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.7 Function overview The following functions can be configured on the module. They cannot all be used at the same time due to the multiple use of the hardware channels and the limited cyclic data length.
  • Page 798: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.7.2 Connection options Channels 1 to 4 can be connected as follows: Channel Function Event counter SSI data Event counter SSI cycle Event counter Event counter Enable reference The functions can also be mixed. For example:...
  • Page 799: Switching Inductive Loads

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.10 Switching inductive loads 100 H 10 H 1000 0.1 H Coil resistance Coil inductance [ ] Ω 0.01 H 240 Ω 100 mA ≙ 1000 10000 Max. switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 4.11.14.11 Calculating the period duration...
  • Page 800: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12 Register description 4.11.14.12.1 Function model 0 - Standard and Function model 1 - 32-bit counter The following 2 models can be selected: • 16-bit counter, Function model 0 • 32-bit counter, Function model 1 (identified in the table with a "(D)" in the data type and "(_32Bit)" in the name.)
  • Page 801 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 1,024 CfO_DIREKTIOoutevent0IDwr UINT ● 1,034 CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask0 USINT ● 1,032 CfO_DIREKTIOoutclearmask0 USINT ● 1,066 CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask1 USINT ● 1,064 CfO_DIREKTIOoutclearmask1 USINT ● 1,056 CfO_DIREKTIOoutevent1IDwr UINT ●...
  • Page 802 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 4,108 CfO_FallingDisProtection USINT ● 4,110 CfO_RisingDisProtection USINT ● Configuration - Time measurement 4,336 CfO_EdgeTimeglobalenable USINT ● 4344 + N * 8 CfO_EdgeTimeFallingMode0N (Index N = 1 to 4) UINT ●...
  • Page 803 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.3 General module registers 4.11.14.12.3.1 Configuring LED status indicators Name: CfO_LED0source to CfO_LED3source These registers can be used to define how the module's LED status indicators are used. Blinking patterns can be generated from the application, and the status of the physical inputs and outputs can be indicated.
  • Page 804 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.4 Digital inputs and outputs 4.11.14.12.4.1 Configure physical channels Name: CfO_CFGchannel01 to CfO_CFGchannel04 This register can be used to configure physical I/O channels 1 to 4. Information: Except for bit 2 (inverted input), all other bits are only available for channels 2 and 4.
  • Page 805 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.4.3 Set mask of the digital channels Name: CfO_OutSetMask The settings in this register only affect the values written to registers 4.11.14.12.4.5 "DigitalOutput02 and 04". • 0 allows manual setting of digital outputs using registers DigitalOutput02 and 04 •...
  • Page 806 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.4.5 Output states of the channels Name: DigitalOutput02 and DigitalOutput04 The output status of a physical channel can be written using this register. In order to configure a channel as an output: 1 Bit 0 "Push"...
  • Page 807 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.5.1 List of event IDs Various hardware and software functions send event IDs or require event IDs in order to start. The following table shows all of the IDs available to configure the module.
  • Page 808 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.5.2 Edge events For each physical input channel there are 3 event functions • Falling edge • Rising edge • Falling and rising edge The respective event is triggered when an edge is detected on the hardware input and the "CfO_EdgeDetectRising"...
  • Page 809 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Enable limit for falling edges Name: CfO_FallingDisProtection This register can be used to enable/disable the event frequency limit for falling edges on the respective channel. Data type Value USINT See bit structure.
  • Page 810 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.5.3 Direct input function The module features a direct input function. This event function is based on comparator functionality. If the event configured in the "CfO_DIREKTIOevent0IDwr" register occurs, the event function compares the status of all Direct I/O channels enabled in the "CfO_EvCompMask"...
  • Page 811 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure the comparator mask for the input function Name: CfO_Ev0CompMask If a bit is set, then the input status of the respective channel is compared with that bit in the "CfO_DIREKTIOeventcompState" register.
  • Page 812 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure channels for setting Name: CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask0 to CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask1 Writing "1" to the bit position that corresponds to a channel sets the output if the output event function is being executed. This corresponds to writing "1" to the 4.11.14.12.4.5 "DigitalOutput 02 and 04" registers.
  • Page 813 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.6 Counters and encoders The module has 2 internal counter functions, each with 2 event counter registers. Each of these 2 counters is permanently assigned to 2 physical inputs. This assignment cannot be changed.
  • Page 814 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.6.2 Sample configurations All of the settings available in Automation Studio for AB encoders, ABR encoders, up/down counters and event counters are based on the two counter functions. The following configuration examples show the values with which Automation Studio initializes the module registers in order to implement these functions.
  • Page 815 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 I/O configuration - ABR encoder The following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an ABR encoder. Register Value Comment For the function CfO_Counter1PresetValue1...
  • Page 816 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 I/O configuration - Event counter The following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an event counter. [x] stands for the respective counter function, either 1 or 2...
  • Page 817 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure counter mode Name: Counter function 1: CfO_Counter1config Counter function 2: CfO_Counter2config These registers are used to configure the mode of the counter function. Each counter function can be operated in 3 different modes.
  • Page 818 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Offset value for referencing Name: Counter function 1: CfO_Counter1PresetValue1 to CfO_Counter2PresetValue1 Counter function 1: CfO_Counter1PresetValue1_32Bit to CfO_Counter2PresetValue1_32Bit Counter function 2: CfO_Counter1PresetValue2 to CfO_Counter1PresetValue2 Counter function 2: CfO_Counter1PresetValue2_32Bit to CfO_Counter1PresetValue2_32Bit "Preset value" in the AS I/O configuration.
  • Page 819 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Status of the ABR encoder Name: StatusABR01 The referencing status of the ABR encoder is shown in this register. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Description Value Information 0 - 1 Reserved Bit is always 1 after the first reference pulse.
  • Page 820 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.6.4 Comparator functions The ABR and AB encoders and the up/down counter have a comparator function. It always works the same and is described here globally for all three. The comparators are implemented in software form. They do not work actively but rather passively, i.e. the com- parison is only carried out when an event is received.
  • Page 821 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure calculation of comparator Name: Counter function 1: CfO_Counter1event0config to CfO_Counter1event1config Counter function 2: CfO_Counter2event0config to CfO_Counter2event1config These registers are used to configure the counter event function for the respective counter function.
  • Page 822 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Comparator origin Name: OriginComparator01 This register is available for the AB and ABR encoders and the up/down counters. It defines the position value at which the respective configured comparator output channel is set.
  • Page 823 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.7 SSI encoder interface The module has 1 SSI encoders available, supported directly in the hardware. Two 24 V output channels are set for the SSI encoder and cannot be changed. (See also 4.11.14.7.1 "Description of channel assignments") When using the SSI encoder, the corresponding clock channel can be configured in the 4.11.14.12.4.1...
  • Page 824 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure SSI Name: CfO_SSI1cfg This configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command.
  • Page 825 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Read SSI position Name: SSIEncoder01 The last transferred SSI position can be read out from this register. The SSI encoder value is displayed as a 32- bit position value. This position value is generated synchronously with the X2X cycle.
  • Page 826 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 Configure calculation of SSI comparator Name: CfO_SSI1event0config The calculation of the position value used for the comparator can be configured in this register. The window comparator condition is calculated as follows: counter_window_value = ssi_counter & (2^ssi_data_bits - 1) diff = counter_window_value –...
  • Page 827 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.8 PWM - Pulse width modulation The module has 2 PWM functions available, supported directly by the hardware. A 24 V output channel is set for each PWM encoder and cannot be changed. (See also 4.11.14.7.1 "Description of channel assignments") When using the PWM function, the corresponding channel can be configured in the 4.11.14.12.4.1...
  • Page 828 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.9 Time measurement function The module has a time measurement function for each I/O channel. It can be configured separately for rising and falling edges on each channel. A starting edge can be configured for each time measurement function. When a configured starting edge occurs, the value of the internal timer is saved in a FIFO.
  • Page 829 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.9.3 Configure time measurement function for the rising edge Name: CfO_EdgeTimeRisingMode01 to CfO_EdgeTimeRisingMode04 These registers can be used to configure the time measurement function for the rising edge of the respective channel.
  • Page 830 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.9.5 Trigger rising edge detection Name: TriggerRisingCH01 to TriggerRisingCH04 If bit 7 "Trigger" is cleared in the 4.11.14.12.9.3 "CfO_EdgeTimeRisingMode" register, then detection of a rising edge on the respective input can be triggered using the respective bit in this register. After a bit has been set, the next rising edge on the corresponding channel is detected.
  • Page 831 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.9.8 Count falling trigger edges Name: CountFallingCH01 to CountFallingCH04 These registers contain cyclic counters that are incremented with every detected falling edge on the respective channel. Data type Value Information USINT 0 to 255 Counter for falling edges 4.11.14.12.9.9 Count rising trigger edges...
  • Page 832 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2395 4.11.14.12.10 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 833: X20Dc2396

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15 X20DC2396 4.11.15.1 General information The module is equipped with two inputs for an ABR incremental encoder with 24 V encoder signal. • 2 ABR incremental encoder 24 V • 2 additional inputs e.g. for home enable switch •...
  • Page 834 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 Product ID X20DC2396 Input resistance 7.19 kΩ Isolation voltage between home enable switch and 500 V Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC ABR incremental encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, asymmetrical Counter size...
  • Page 835: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 836: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs ABR x Input status I/O status 24 V LED (green) Encoder x 24 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) X20 system User's Manual 3.10...
  • Page 837: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8 Register description 4.11.15.8.1 Function model 0 - Standard and Function model 1 - Standard with 32-bit encoder counter value The difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the data type for some registers.
  • Page 838 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8.3 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.15.8.3.1 Reference pulse The following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on the edge of the reference pulse.
  • Page 839 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8.3.2 Setting the home position Name: CfO_PresetABR01_1 to CfO_PresetABR01_2 CfO_PresetABR02_1 to CfO_PresetABR02_2 CfO_PresetABR01_1_32Bit to CfO_PresetABR01_2_32Bit CfO_PresetABR02_1_32Bit to CfO_PresetABR02_2_32Bit (only in function model 1) It is possible to specify two home positions for each encoder with these registers through a one-off acyclic write, for example (default = 0).
  • Page 840 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8.4 ABR encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.15.8.4.1 Counter state of the encoders Name: Encoder01 to Encoder02 The encoder values are displayed in this register. Data type Value -32,768 to 32,767 DINT -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 Only in function model 1 4.11.15.8.4.2 Input state of digital inputs 1 to 2...
  • Page 841 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8.4.4 Status of the homing procedure Name: StatusInput01 (for encoder 1) to StatusInput02 (for encoder 2) This register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete. Data type...
  • Page 842 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2396 4.11.15.8.5 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 843: X20Dc2398

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16 X20DC2398 4.11.16.1 General information This module is equipped with two inputs for SSI absolute encoders with 24 V encoder signal. • 2 SSI absolute encoder 24 V • 2 additional inputs •...
  • Page 844 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 Product ID X20DC2398 Input resistance 7.19 kΩ Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V SSI absolute encoder Encoder inputs 24 V, asymmetrical Counter size 32-bit Max.
  • Page 845: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 846: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16.7 Input circuit diagram Counter inputs Data x Input status I/O status 24 V LED (green) Encoder x 24 V Standard inputs Input x Input status I/O status Led (green) 4.11.16.8 Output circuit diagram...
  • Page 847: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16.9 Register description 4.11.16.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Configuration 7176 ConfigOutput15 UINT ● 7432 ConfigOutput16 UINT ● 7172 ConfigAdvanced01 UDINT ●...
  • Page 848 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16.9.3.2 Extended configuration Name: ConfigAdvanced01 to ConfigAdvanced02 This configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate, the number of bits and the monostable multivi- brator settings. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command.
  • Page 849 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC2398 4.11.16.9.4 SSI encoder - Configuration registers 4.11.16.9.4.1 SSI position values Name: Encoder01 to Encoder02 The two SSI encoder values are displayed as 32-bit position values. The SSI position values are generated syn- chronously with the X2X cycle.
  • Page 850: X20Dc4395

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17 X20DC4395 4.11.17.1 General information This module is a multifunctional counter module. It can be connected to two SSI encoders, two ABR encoders, four AB encoders or eight event counters. Four outputs are available for pulse width modulation. The functions can also be mixed.
  • Page 851: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.3 Technical data Product ID X20DC4395 Short description I/O module 2 SSI absolute encoder, 24 V, 2 ABR incremental encoder, 24 V, 4 AB incremental encoders, 24 V, 8x event counters or 4x pulse width modulation, time measurement, relative timestamp...
  • Page 852 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Product ID X20DC4395 Measurement type Continuous or triggered Digital outputs Design Push / Pull / Push-Pull Quantity Nominal voltage 24 VDC Switching voltage 24 VDC -15% / +20% Nominal output current 0.1 A Total nominal current 0.4 A...
  • Page 853: Led Status Indicators

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.4 LED status indicators For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 854: Function Overview

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.7 Function overview The following functions can be configured on the module. They cannot all be used at the same time due to the multiple use of the hardware channels and the limited cyclic data length.
  • Page 855 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.7.1 Description of channel assignments The functions listed here are directly assigned to the respective hardware channels and cannot be changed: Channel Signal connections • Digital input 1 • Event counter 1 •...
  • Page 856: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.7.2 Connection options Channels 1 to 8 can be connected as follows: Channel Function Event counter SSI data Event counter SSI cycle Event counter Event counter Enable reference Event counter SSI data...
  • Page 857: Switching Inductive Loads

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.10 Switching inductive loads 100 H 10 H 1000 0.1 H Coil resistance Coil inductance [ ] Ω 0.01 H 240 Ω 100 mA ≙ 1000 10000 Max. switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 4.11.17.11 Calculating the period duration...
  • Page 858: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12 Register description 4.11.17.12.1 Function model 0 - Standard and Function model 1 - 32-bit counter The following 2 models can be selected: • 16-bit counter, Function model 0 • 32-bit counter, Function model 1 (identified in the table with a "(D)" in the data type and "(_32Bit)" in the name.)
  • Page 859 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 1,024 CfO_DIREKTIOoutevent0IDwr UINT ● 1034 + N * 32 CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmaskN (Index N = 0 to 3) USINT ● 1032 + N * 32...
  • Page 860 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 7,248 OriginComparator01 UDINT ● 7,504 OriginComparator02 UDINT ● 7,252 MarginComparator01 UDINT ● 7,508 MarginComparator02 UDINT ● Input states of the channels USINT ●...
  • Page 861 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.2 Function model 254 - Bus controller Unlike the function models 0 and 1, this model only offers a selection of functions with a limited scope of config- uration on the module.
  • Page 862 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.3 General module registers 4.11.17.12.3.1 Configuring LED status indicators Name: CfO_LED0source to CfO_LED7source These registers can be used to define how the module's LED status indicators are used. Blinking patterns can be generated from the application, and the status of the physical inputs and outputs can be indicated.
  • Page 863 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.4 Digital inputs and outputs 4.11.17.12.4.1 Configure physical channels Name: CfO_CFGchannel01 to CfO_CFGchannel08 This register can be used to configure physical I/O channels 1 to 8. Information: Except for bit 2 (inverted input), all other bits are only available for channels 2, 4, 6 and 8.
  • Page 864 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.4.3 Set mask of the digital channels Name: CfO_OutSetMask The settings in this register only affect the values written to registers 4.11.17.12.4.5 "DigitalOutput02 to 08". • 0 allows manual setting of digital outputs using registers DigitalOutput02 to 04 •...
  • Page 865 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.4.4 Input states of the channels Name: see "Name in the AS I/O configuration" This register reads the input status of a physical channel. The polarity settings are accounted for in the value (bit 2 in 4.11.17.12.4.1 "CfO_CFGchannel[x]"...
  • Page 866 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.5 Event functions The module provides configurable event functions. An event function can be connected to physical I/O and the values derived from them (e.g. counters) or be purely used for internal processing.
  • Page 867 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.5.1 List of event IDs Various hardware and software functions send event IDs or require event IDs in order to start. The following table shows all of the IDs available to configure the module.
  • Page 868 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Timer There are 8 timer events that the module can generate. Information: The timers have the highest event priority. All other system functions are interrupted when a timer event occurs, and jitter for the amount of time it takes to process the event.
  • Page 869 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Generate event on rising edge Name: CfO_EdgeDetectRising This register defines whether an event is generated on a rising edge. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure: Description Value Information Channel 1 No event generated on rising edge.
  • Page 870 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure event ID for input function Name: CfO_DIREKTIOevent0IDwr to CfO_DIREKTIOevent1IDwr This register holds the event ID generated by the direct input function. For a list of all possible event IDs, see 4.11.17.12.5.1 "List of event IDs"...
  • Page 871 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.5.4 Direct output functions The module has 4 of these event functions The effect of executing this event function is similar to writing to the 4.11.17.12.4.5 "DigitalOutput02 to 08" regis- ters. When this event function is triggered, however, the changed output states are passed on to the hardware immediately, regardless of the X2X cycle.
  • Page 872 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure channels for setting Name: CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask0 to CfO_DIREKTIOoutsetmask3 Writing "1" to the bit position that corresponds to a channel sets the output if the output event function is being executed. This corresponds to writing "1" to the 4.11.17.12.4.5 "DigitalOutput 02 to 08" registers.
  • Page 873 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.6 Counters and encoders The module has 4 internal counter functions, each with 2 event counter registers. Each of these 4 counters is permanently assigned to 2 physical inputs. This assignment cannot be changed.
  • Page 874 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.6.2 Sample configurations All of the settings available in Automation Studio for AB encoders, ABR encoders, up/down counters and event counters are based on the two counter functions. The following configuration examples show the values with which Automation Studio initializes the module registers in order to implement these functions.
  • Page 875 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 I/O configuration - ABR encoder The following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an ABR encoder. Register Value Comment For the function CfO_Counter1PresetValue1...
  • Page 876 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 I/O configuration - Up/down counter The following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an up/ down counter. [x] stands for the respective counter function, from 1 to 4...
  • Page 877 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.6.3 General event functions Each of the 4 counter functions has 2 counter event functions. These consist of: • Event ID that triggers the counter event function • A window comparator • Latch register for saving the counter value When the counter event function is complete, a combined event ID in the range 2112 to 2913 (see 4.11.17.12.5.1...
  • Page 878 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure calculation of internal counters Name: CfO_Counter1configReg0 to CfO_Counter4configReg0 ("counter 1") CfO_Counter1configReg1 to CfO_Counter4configReg1 ("counter 2") The calculation of the internal "counter1" and "counter2" registers can be configured in these registers. For infor- mation on using these internal registers, see 4.11.17.12.6.1 "Counter value calculation".
  • Page 879 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Counter register Name: Different names are used for these 8 registers depending on their function. These 8 registers show the results of the counter value calculation for the respective register. Depending on the function, this corresponds to either the encoder position or the counter value.
  • Page 880 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure ABR referencing mode Name: ReferenceModeABR01 to ReferenceModeABR02 The bits in this register are used to configure the reaction to the configured reference pulse. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure:...
  • Page 881 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure calculation of comparator Name: CfO_Counter1event0config to CfO_Counter4event0config (event function 1) CfO_Counter1event1config to CfO_Counter4event1config (event function 2) These registers are used to configure the counter event function for the respective counter function.
  • Page 882 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Comparator origin Name: OriginComparator01 to OriginComparator02 (ABR encoder) OriginComparator01 and OriginComparator03 (AB encoder and up/down counter) This register is available for the AB and ABR encoders and the up/down counters. It defines the position value at which the respective configured comparator output channel is set.
  • Page 883 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.7 SSI encoder interface The module has 2 SSI encoders available, supported directly in the hardware. Two 24 V output channels are set for each SSI encoder and cannot be changed. (See also 4.11.17.7.1 "Description of channel assignments") When using the SSI encoder, the corresponding clock channel can be configured in the 4.11.17.12.4.1...
  • Page 884 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure SSI Name: CfO_SSI1cfg to CfO_SSI2cfg This configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command.
  • Page 885 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Read SSI position Name: SSIEncoder01 to SSIEncoder02 The last transferred SSI position can be read out from this register. The SSI encoder value is displayed as a 32- bit position value. This position value is generated synchronously with the X2X cycle.
  • Page 886 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 Configure calculation of SSI comparator Name: CfO_SSI1event0config and CfO_SSI2event0config The calculation of the position value used for the comparator can be configured in this register. The window comparator condition is calculated as follows: counter_window_value = ssi_counter &...
  • Page 887 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.8 PWM - Pulse width modulation The module has 4 PWM functions available, supported directly by the hardware. A 24 V output channel is set for each PWM encoder and cannot be changed. (See also 4.11.17.7.1 "Description of channel assignments") When using the PWM function, the corresponding channel can be configured in the 4.11.17.12.4.1...
  • Page 888 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.9 Time measurement function The module has a time measurement function for each I/O channel. It can be configured separately for rising and falling edges on each channel. A starting edge can be configured for each time measurement function. When a configured starting edge occurs, the value of the internal timer is saved in a FIFO.
  • Page 889 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.9.3 Configure time measurement function for the rising edge Name: CfO_EdgeTimeRisingMode01 to CfO_EdgeTimeRisingMode08 These registers can be used to configure the time measurement function for the rising edge of the respective channel.
  • Page 890 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.9.6 Show first falling trigger edge Name: BusyTriggerFallingCH01 to BusyTriggerFallingCH08 If edges are triggered via the bits in the 4.11.17.12.9.4 "TriggerFallingCH" register, then a set bit in this register indicates that no falling edges have been detected on the respective channel since the corresponding bit was set in the "TriggerFallingCH"...
  • Page 891 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.9.11 Time stamp of the rising edge Name: TimeStampRisingCH01 to TimeStampRisingCH08 When a rising edge occurs on the respective channel, the current counter value of the module timer is copied to these registers.
  • Page 892 X20 system modules • Counter modules • X20DC4395 4.11.17.12.10 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 893: X20 Cpus

    4.12 X20 CPUs The X20 CPUs are a powerful addition to the X20 system. With the exception of the entry level model, all CPUs are based on Intel ATOM™ processors, which are available in various performance classes. Each CPU is available with either one or three slots for interface modules.
  • Page 894: Brief Information

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • Brief information 4.12.1 Brief information Product ID Short description on page X20CP1483 X20 CPU, x86 100 MHz Intel compatible, 32 MB DRAM, 128 kB SRAM, removable application memory: Com- pactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 895: X20Cp1483 And X20Cp1483-1

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2 X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.1 General information The x86 100 MHz-compatible X20CP1483 is the entry-level X20 CPU. With an optimal price/performance ratio, it has the same basic features as the larger CPUs and offers sufficient performance for most standard applications.
  • Page 896: Order Data - X20Cp148X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.2 Order data - X20CP148x Model number Short description X20 CPUs X20CP1483 X20 CPU, x86 100 MHz Intel compatible, 32 MB DRAM, 128 kB SRAM, removable application memory: CompactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 interface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 897: Technical Data - X20Cp148X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.3 Technical data - X20CP148x Product ID X20CP1483 X20CP1483-1 Short description Interfaces 1x RS232, 1x Ethernet, 1x POWERLINK (V1/V2), 2x USB, 1x X2X Link System module General information Cooling Fanless B&R ID code...
  • Page 898 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 Product ID X20CP1483 X20CP1483-1 Diagnostics RS232 data transfer Yes, using status LED Module run/error Yes, using status LED and software Overload Yes, using status LED and software Electrical isolation I/O feed - I/O supply...
  • Page 899 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 Product ID X20CP1483 X20CP1483-1 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Derating See section "Derating" Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C...
  • Page 900: X20 Cpus - Status Leds

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.4 X20 CPUs - Status LEDs Figure Color Status Description Green Application running Blinking Boot mode system start: CPU initializing the application, all bus systems and I/O modules SERVICE mode Blinking The "R/E"...
  • Page 901 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.4.1.3 POWERLINK V2 Red - Error Description The module is in an error mode (failed Ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on the network, etc.). If an error occurs in the following states, then the green LED blinks over the red LED: •...
  • Page 902 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 Green - Status Description Mode The module is in PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 mode. PDO mapping is active and cyclic data is being evaluated. Blinking (approx. 2.5 Hz) Mode The module is in STOPPED mode.
  • Page 903: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.5 LED status indicators for the integrated power supply Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode No power to module or everything OK...
  • Page 904: Slot For Application Memory

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.7 Slot for application memory These CPUs require application memory in order to operate. The application memory is provided in the form of a CompactFlash card. It is not included with the CPUs, but must be ordered separately as an accessory.
  • Page 905: Cpu Supply

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.10 CPU supply A power supply is integrated in the X20 CPUs. It has a feed for the CPU, the X2X Link and the internal I/O supply. Supply for the CPU and X2X Link is electrically isolated.
  • Page 906: Rs232 Interface (If1)

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.11 RS232 interface (IF1) The non-electrically isolated RS232 interface is primarily intended to serve as an online interface for communication with the programming device. Figure 295: X20 CPUs - Pinout of the RS232 interface (IF1) 4.12.2.12 Ethernet interface (IF2)
  • Page 907: Powerlink Interface (If3)

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.13 POWERLINK interface (IF3) POWERLINK V1 Switch position Description 0x00 Operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xFD Node number of the POWERLINK node. Operation as controlled node. 0xFE - 0xFF...
  • Page 908: Usb Interfaces (If4 And If5)

    USB interfaces cannot be used for online communication with a programming device. 4.12.2.15 Slots for interface modules The CPUs have one or three slots for interface modules. Various bus and network systems can easily be integrated into the X20 system by selecting the corresponding interface module. 4.12.2.16 Overtemperature cutoff To prevent damage, a shut-off/reset is triggered on the CPU when the processor reaches 100°C.
  • Page 909: Data / Real-Time Clock Buffering

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.17 Data / Real-time clock buffering The CPUs are buffered by a backup battery. The following areas are buffered: • Remanent variables • User RAM • System RAM • Real-time clock Battery monitoring The battery voltage is checked cyclically.
  • Page 910 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 Procedure for exreplacing the battery 1. Touch the mounting rail or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body. 2. Remove the cover for the lithium battery. Do this by sliding it down and away from the CPU.
  • Page 911: Programming The System Flash Memory

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP1483 and X20CP1483-1 4.12.2.19 Programming the system flash memory General information In order for the application project to be executed on the CPU, the Automation Runtime operating system, the system components and the application project must be installed on the CompactFlash card.
  • Page 912: X20Cp158X And X20Cp358X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3 X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.1 General information Based on state-of-the-art Intel® ATOM™ processor technology, X20 CPUs cover a wide spectrum of requirements. They can be implemented in solutions ranging from standard applications to those requiring the highest levels of performance.
  • Page 913: Order Data - X20Cp158X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.2 Order data - X20CP158x Model number Short description X20 CPUs X20CP1583 X20 CPU, ATOM 333 MHz compatible, 128 MB DDR2 RAM, 1 MB SRAM, removable application memory: CompactFlash, 1 insert slot for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 in- terface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100/1000 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 914: Technical Data - X20Cp158X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.3 Technical data - X20CP158x Product ID X20CP1583 X20CP1584 X20CP1585 X20CP1586 Short description Interfaces 1x RS232, 1x Ethernet, 1x POWERLINK (V1/V2), 2x USB, 1x X2X Link System module General information...
  • Page 915 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Product ID X20CP1583 X20CP1584 X20CP1585 X20CP1586 Diagnostics RS232 data transfer Yes, using status LED Module run/error Yes, using status Yes, with status LED Yes, using status Yes, with status LED...
  • Page 916 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Product ID X20CP1583 X20CP1584 X20CP1585 X20CP1586 Installation at elevations above sea level 0 to 2000 m No limitations >2000 m Reduction of ambient temperature by 0.5°C per 100 m EN 60529 protection...
  • Page 917: Order Data - X20Cp358X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.4 Order data - X20CP358x Model number Short description X20 CPUs X20CP3583 X20 CPU, ATOM 333 MHz compatible, 128 MB DDR2 RAM, 1 MB SRAM, removable application memory: CompactFlash, 3 insert slots for X20 interface modules, 2 USB interfaces, 1 RS232 in- terface, 1 Ethernet interface 10/100/1000 Base-T, 1 POWERLINK interface, incl.
  • Page 918: X20Cp358X - Technical Data

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.5 X20CP358x - Technical data Product ID X20CP3583 X20CP3584 X20CP3585 X20CP3586 Short description Interfaces 1x RS232, 1x Ethernet, 1x POWERLINK (V1/V2), 2x USB, 1x X2X Link System module General information...
  • Page 919 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Product ID X20CP3583 X20CP3584 X20CP3585 X20CP3586 Diagnostics RS232 data transfer Yes, using status LED Module run/error Yes, using status LED and software Overload Yes, using status LED and software Electrical isolation...
  • Page 920 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Product ID X20CP3583 X20CP3584 X20CP3585 X20CP3586 EN 60529 protection IP20 Environmental conditions Temperature Operation Horizontal installation -25 to 60°C Vertical installation -25 to 50°C Derating See section "Derating" Storage -40 to 85°C Transport -40 to 85°C...
  • Page 921: X20 Cpus - Status Leds

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.6 X20 CPUs - Status LEDs Figure Color Status Description Green Application running Blinking Boot mode system start: CPU initializing the application, all bus systems and I/O modules SERVICE mode Blinking The "R/E"...
  • Page 922 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.6.1.3 POWERLINK V2 Red - Error Description The module is in an error mode (failed Ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on the network, etc.). If an error occurs in the following states, then the green LED blinks over the red LED: •...
  • Page 923 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Green - Status Description Mode The module is in PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 mode. PDO mapping is active and cyclic data is being evaluated. Blinking (approx. 2.5 Hz) Mode The module is in STOPPED mode.
  • Page 924: Led Status Indicators For The Integrated Power Supply

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.7 LED status indicators for the integrated power supply Figure Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode RUN mode No power to module or everything OK...
  • Page 925: Operating And Connection Elements

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.8 Operating and connection elements X20CP158x Mounting rail Operating mode- CompactFlash LED status indicators lock switch IF6 - X2X Link IF1 - RS232 Terminal block for CPU and I/O supply,...
  • Page 926: Slot For Application Memory

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.9 Slot for application memory These CPUs require application memory in order to operate. The application memory is provided in the form of a CompactFlash card. It is not included with the CPUs, but must be ordered separately as an accessory.
  • Page 927: Cpu Supply

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.12 CPU supply A power supply is integrated in the X20 CPUs. It has a feed for the CPU, the X2X Link and the internal I/O supply. Supply for the CPU and X2X Link is electrically isolated.
  • Page 928: Rs232 Interface (If1)

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.13 RS232 interface (IF1) The non-electrically isolated RS232 interface is primarily intended to serve as an online interface for communication with the programming device. Figure 309: X20 CPUs - Pinout of the RS232 interface (IF1) 4.12.3.14 Ethernet interface (IF2)
  • Page 929: Powerlink Interface (If3)

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.15 POWERLINK interface (IF3) POWERLINK V1 Switch position Description 0x00 Operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xFD Node number of the POWERLINK node. Operation as controlled node. 0xFE - 0xFF...
  • Page 930: Usb Interfaces (If4 And If5)

    USB interfaces cannot be used for online communication with a programming device. 4.12.3.17 Slots for interface modules The CPUs have one or three slots for interface modules. Various bus and network systems can easily be integrated into the X20 system by selecting the corresponding interface module. 4.12.3.18 Overtemperature cutoff To prevent damage, the CPU is cut off and reset when the processor reaches 110°C or the circuit board reaches...
  • Page 931: Data / Real-Time Clock Buffering

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.19 Data / Real-time clock buffering The CPUs are buffered by a backup battery. The following areas are buffered: • Remanent variables • User RAM • System RAM • Real-time clock Battery monitoring The battery voltage is checked cyclically.
  • Page 932 X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x Procedure for exreplacing the battery 1. Touch the mounting rail or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body. 2. Remove the cover for the lithium battery. Do this by sliding it down and away from the CPU.
  • Page 933: Programming The System Flash Memory

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.21 Programming the system flash memory General information In order for the application project to be executed on the CPU, the Automation Runtime operating system, the system components and the application project must be installed on the CompactFlash card.
  • Page 934: Information Regarding Switching From X20Cpx48X To X20Cpx58X

    X20 system modules • X20 CPUs • X20CP158x and X20CP358x 4.12.3.22 Information regarding switching from X20CPx48x to X20CPx58x • A hardware upgrade is required for some X20 IFxxxx interface modules. This can be installed from Au- tomation Studio by selecting Tools/Upgrades from the menu.
  • Page 935: Digital Input Modules

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • Brief information 4.13 Digital input modules Digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the PLC. The states of the digital inputs are indicated with status LEDs.
  • Page 936: X20Di2371

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2 X20DI2371 4.13.2.1 General Information The module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. This module is designed for X20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.g. for logistical reasons), the 12-pin terminal block can also be used.
  • Page 937: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI2371 Short description I/O module 2 digital inputs 24 VDC for 3-wire connections General information B&R ID code 0x1B8D Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status...
  • Page 938: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re LEDs" section. Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking...
  • Page 939: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2.7 Input circuit diagram Input x I/O status LED (green) Input status 24 V 24 V 4.13.2.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.2.9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 940: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2.9 Register description 4.13.2.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput02 Bit 1 ConfigOutput01 USINT ●...
  • Page 941 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2371 4.13.2.9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 Name: DigitalInput or DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 The input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 942: X20Di2372

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3 X20DI2372 4.13.3.1 General Information The module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. This module is designed for X20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.g. for logistical reasons), the 12-pin terminal block can also be used.
  • Page 943: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI2372 Short description I/O module 2 digital inputs 24 VDC for 3-wire connections General information B&R ID code 0x22A7 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status...
  • Page 944: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 945: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3.7 Input circuit diagram Input x I/O status LED (green) Input status 24 V 24 V 4.13.3.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.3.9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 946: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3.9 Register description 4.13.3.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput02 Bit 1 ConfigOutput01 USINT ●...
  • Page 947 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2372 4.13.3.9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 Name: DigitalInput or DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 The input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 948: X20Di2377

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4 X20DI2377 4.13.4.1 General Information The module is equipped with two inputs for 3-wire connections. Both inputs can be configured as event counters. Gate measurement is only ever possible on one channel.
  • Page 949 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 Product ID X20DI2377 Input filter Hardware ≤10 μs Software Default 0 ms, can be configured between 0 and 25 ms in 0.2 ms intervals Connection type 3-wire connections Input circuit Sink...
  • Page 950: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 951: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.7 Input circuit diagram Input x 24 V 24 V Input status I/O status LED (green) 4.13.4.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.4.9.4.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 952: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.9 Register description 4.13.4.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput02 Bit 1 Counter01 USINT ●...
  • Page 953 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.9.4 Digital inputs Unfiltered The input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered The filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtering takes place asynchronously to the network in multiples of 200 µs with a network-related jitter of up to 50 µs.
  • Page 954 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.9.5 Counter operation The following operation modes can be selected: • Event counter mode • Event counter mode with software (processed after the input filter) • Gate measurement Event counter mode The rising (positive) edges are registered on the counter input.
  • Page 955 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2377 4.13.4.9.6 Positive edge input latch Using this function, the positive edges of the input signal can be latched with a resolution of 200 µs. With the "Acknowledge - input latch" function, the input latch is either reset or prevented from latching.
  • Page 956: X20Di2653

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5 X20DI2653 4.13.5.1 General Information The module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. It is designed for an input voltage of 100 to 240 VAC. • 2 digital inputs •...
  • Page 957: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI2653 Short description I/O module 2 digital inputs 100 to 240 VAC for 3-wire connections General information B&R ID code 0x2544 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status...
  • Page 958: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 959: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5.7 Input circuit diagram Input status Input x Diagnostics status U ok Voltage monitoring 4.13.5.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.5.9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 960: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5.9 Register description 4.13.5.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput02 Bit 1 PowerSupply...
  • Page 961 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI2653 4.13.5.9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 Name: DigitalInput or DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput02 PowerSupply The input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 962: X20Di4371

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6 X20DI4371 4.13.6.1 General Information The module is equipped with four inputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital inputs • Sink connection • 3-wire connections • 4 counter inputs with 1 kHz counter frequency •...
  • Page 963 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 Product ID X20DI4371 Switching threshold <5 VDC High >15 VDC Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V Event counter Quantity Signal form Square wave pulse Evaluation Configurable edge event, cyclic counter Input frequency Max.
  • Page 964: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 965: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6.7 Input circuit diagram Input x I/O status LED (green) Input status 24 V 24 V 4.13.6.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.6.9.4.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 966: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6.9 Register description 4.13.6.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput04 Bit 3 ConfigOutput01 USINT ●...
  • Page 967 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6.9.4.1 Digital input filter Name: ConfigOutput01 This register can be used to specify the filter value for all digital inputs. The filter value can be configured in steps of 100 μs. It makes sense to enter values in steps of 2, however, since the input signals are sampled every 200 μs.
  • Page 968 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4371 4.13.6.9.5.2 Resets the counter registers Name: ResetCounter01 to ResetCounter04 Using these data points, the corresponding counter registers can be reset to 0. Data type Value USINT See bit structure. Bit structure:...
  • Page 969: X20Di4372

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7 X20DI4372 4.13.7.1 General Information The module is equipped with 4 inputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital inputs • Source connection • 3-wire connections • 24 VDC and GND for sensor supply •...
  • Page 970: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI4372 Short description I/O module 4 digital inputs 24 VDC for 3-wire connections General information B&R ID code 0x22A8 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status...
  • Page 971: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 972: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7.7 Input circuit diagram Input x I/O status LED (green) Input status 24 V 24 V 4.13.7.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.7.9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 973: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7.9 Register description 4.13.7.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput04 Bit 3 ConfigOutput01 USINT ●...
  • Page 974 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4372 4.13.7.9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 Name: DigitalInput or DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput04 The input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 975: X20Di4375

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8 X20DI4375 4.13.8.1 General Information The module is equipped with four inputs for 3-wire connections. It has open circuit and short circuit detection. This detection can be switched off individually for each channel.
  • Page 976: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI4375 Short description I/O module 4 digital inputs 24 VDC for 3-line connections, open line and short cir- cuit detection, detection can be switched off individually for each channel General information B&R ID code...
  • Page 977: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Double flash...
  • Page 978: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.7 Input circuit diagram Input value Input x Converter I/O status 24 V LED (green) 24 V VDC Monitoring the 24 VDC Sensor supply voltage Sensor supply status (S1 - S4)
  • Page 979: Error Status

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 Connection options To guarantee error-free functionality of the open circuit and short circuit detection, the +24 VDC sensor supply from the module must absolutely be used. Sensor connections Description Detection Setting in configuration register...
  • Page 980: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13 Register description 4.13.8.13.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic 2305 DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput04 Bit 3 StateDigitalInput01 Bit 4...
  • Page 981 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13.3 Digital inputs Unfiltered The input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered The filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtering takes place asynchronously to the network in multiples of 200 µs with a network-related jitter of up to 50 µs.
  • Page 982 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13.4 Short circuit monitoring of channels 1 to 4 Name: StatusInput01 or SC_DigitalInput01 to SC_DigitalInput04 This register indicates whether a short circuit has occurred on the individual channels. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 983 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13.6 Voltage monitoring on channels 1 to 4 Name: StatusInput03 or SM_DigitalInput01 to SM_DigitalInput04 This register monitors the voltage supply on the individual channels. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs" setting in the AS I/O configuration is used to determine whether all of this register's bits should be set up individually as data points in the AS I/O mapping ("SM_DigitalInput01"...
  • Page 984 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13.9 Configuration of line status monitoring Name: ConfigOutput01 This register is used to configure short circuit monitoring and line status monitoring on the inputs. Data type Value UINT See bit structure...
  • Page 985 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4375 4.13.8.13.10 Minimum cycle time The minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for handling monitoring, diagnostics and acyclic commands.
  • Page 986: X20Di4653

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9 X20DI4653 4.13.9.1 General Information The module is equipped with 4 inputs for 2-wire connections. It is designed for an input voltage of 100 to 240 VAC. • 4 digital inputs •...
  • Page 987: Technical Data

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9.3 Technical data Product ID X20DI4653 Short description I/O module 4 digital inputs 100 to 240 VAC for 2-wire connections General information B&R ID code 0x2545 Status indicators I/O function per channel, operating state, module status...
  • Page 988: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 989: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9.7 Input circuit diagram Input status Input x Diagnostics status U ok Voltage monitoring 4.13.9.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.9.9.3.1 "ConfigOutput01".
  • Page 990: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9.9 Register description 4.13.9.9.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Fixed offset Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput04 Bit 3 PowerSupply...
  • Page 991 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4653 4.13.9.9.3.2 Input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 Name: DigitalInput or DigitalInput01 to DigitalInput04 PowerSupply The input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - Standard only: The "packed inputs"...
  • Page 992: X20Di4760

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10 X20DI4760 4.13.10.1 General Information The module is used to transfer digital signals from NAMUR encoders according to EN 60947-5-6. In addition to NAMUR encoders, normal switches can also be used.
  • Page 993 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 Product ID X20DI4760 NAMUR inputs Open line detection <350 µA Input circuit For NAMUR encoders in accordance with EN 60947-5-6 Isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 V Short circuit detection >7 mA...
  • Page 994: Status Leds

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.4 Status LEDs For a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re LEDs". Image Color Status Description Green No power to module Single flash RESET mode Blinking PREOPERATIONAL mode...
  • Page 995: Input Circuit Diagram

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.7 Input circuit diagram Signal- evaluation Kx + Kx - I/O status Line state LED (green) LED (red) 4.13.10.8 Input filter An input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.10.10.3.1 "ConfigOutput03"...
  • Page 996: Examples Of Possible Signal Generators

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.9 Examples of possible signal generators Proximity switch + input x Switch in accordance with EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) - input x Mechanical contacts (instead of NAMUR encoders) + input x Without open line detection and without short circuit detection...
  • Page 997: Register Description

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.10 Register description 4.13.10.10.1 Function model 0 - Standard Register Name Data type Read Write Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic DigitalInput USINT ● DigitalInput01 Bit 0 DigitalInput04 Bit 3 Counter01 USINT ●...
  • Page 998 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.10.3 Digital inputs Unfiltered The input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered The filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtering takes place asynchronously to the network in multiples of 200 µs with a network-related jitter of up to 50 µs.
  • Page 999 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.10.5 Status of channels 1 to 4 Name: StatusInput01 or ShortCircuit01 to ShortCircuit04 OpenLine01 to OpenLine04 This register indicates whether an open line or overflow has occurred on the individual channels.
  • Page 1000 X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI4760 4.13.10.10.6 Function expansion Firmware version 802 is offered for hardware variant 7 or higher of the module. This and subsequent firmware versions provide the user with new configuration possibilities. 4.13.10.10.6.1 Disabling channels and status messages...
  • Page 1001: X20Di6371

    X20 system modules • Digital input modules • X20DI6371 4.13.11 X20DI6371 4.13.11.1 General Information The module is equipped with six inputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The X20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiring. Two-line wiring can be implemented using the 12-pin terminal block. The inputs on the module are designed for sink connections.

Table of Contents

Save PDF